MC68HC05V7CFN [NXP]

IC,MICROCONTROLLER,8-BIT,6805 CPU,CMOS,LDCC,68PIN,PLASTIC;
MC68HC05V7CFN
型号: MC68HC05V7CFN
厂家: NXP    NXP
描述:

IC,MICROCONTROLLER,8-BIT,6805 CPU,CMOS,LDCC,68PIN,PLASTIC

时钟 微控制器 外围集成电路
文件: 总170页 (文件大小:980K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
HC05V7GRS/D  
REV 1.0  
68HC05V7  
SPECIFICATION  
REV 1.0  
(General Release)  
August 12, 1994  
MCU System Design Group  
Oak Hill, Texas  
Motorola reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein  
to improve reliability, function or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out  
of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey  
any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Motorola products are not  
designed, intended, or authorized for use as components in systems intended for surgical  
implant into the body, or other applications intended to support or sustain life, or for any  
other application in which the failure of the Motorola product could create a situation  
where personal injury or death may occur. Should Buyer purchase or use Motorola  
products for any such unintended or unauthorized application, Buyer shall indemnify and  
hold Motorola and its officers, employees, subsidiaries, affiliates, and distributors  
harmless against all claims, costs, damages, and expenses, and reasonable attorney  
fees arising out of, directly or indirectly, any claim of personal injury or death associated  
with such unintended or unauthorized use, even if such claim alleges that Motorola was  
negligent regarding the design or manufacture of the part.  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
HC05V7GRS/D  
REV 1.0  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SECTION 1  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION ..............................................1  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
1.4  
FEATURES.................................................................................1  
MASK OPTIONS ........................................................................2  
PIN ASSIGNMENTS...................................................................2  
MCU STRUCTURE ....................................................................8  
FUNCTIONAL PIN DESCRIPTION ............................................9  
1.5  
1.5.1  
1.5.2  
1.5.3  
1.5.4  
1.5.5  
1.5.6  
1.5.7  
1.5.8  
1.5.9  
1.5.10  
1.5.11  
1.5.12  
1.5.13  
1.5.14  
1.5.15  
1.5.16  
1.5.17  
V
V
V
V
V
V
.....................................................................................9  
BATT  
AND V ........................................................................9  
DD  
SS  
.....................................................................................9  
.....................................................................................9  
......................................................................................9  
SSA1  
SSA2  
CCA  
AND V  
.................................................................9  
REFH  
REFL  
OSC1, OSC2.......................................................................10  
RESET ................................................................................11  
IRQ (MASKABLE INTERRUPT REQUEST) .......................11  
PA0-PA7..............................................................................11  
PB0-PB5, PB6/TCMP, PB7/TCAP ......................................11  
PC0-PC7 .............................................................................11  
AD0-AD7 / PD0-PD7: AD8-AD15/PE0-PE7........................12  
PWM....................................................................................12  
PF0/SS, PF1/SCK, PF2/MOSI, PF3/MISO .........................12  
BUS, LOAD, REXT1, REXT2..............................................12  
V
.....................................................................................12  
IGN  
SECTION 2  
MEMORY MAP ..............................................................13  
2.1  
2.2  
2.3  
2.4  
2.5  
SINGLE-CHIP MODE MEMORY MAP.....................................13  
I/O AND CONTROL REGISTERS............................................13  
RAM..........................................................................................14  
ROM .........................................................................................15  
EEPROM ..................................................................................15  
SECTION 3  
EEPROM........................................................................21  
3.1  
EEPROM PROGRAMMING REGISTER $1C ..........................21  
CPEN - Charge Pump Enable.............................................21  
ER1:ER0 - Erase Select Bits...............................................21  
LATCH.................................................................................22  
EERC - EEPROM RC Oscillator Control.............................22  
EEPGM - EEPROM Programming Power Enable...............22  
OPERATION IN STOP AND WAIT...........................................24  
3.1.1  
3.1.2  
3.1.3  
3.1.4  
3.1.5  
3.2  
MOTOROLA  
Page iii  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 4  
CPU CORE.....................................................................25  
4.1  
REGISTERS............................................................................. 25  
ACCUMULATOR (A) .......................................................... 25  
INDEX REGISTER (X)........................................................ 25  
STACK POINTER (SP)....................................................... 26  
PROGRAM COUNTER (PC) .............................................. 26  
CONDITION CODE REGISTER (CCR).............................. 26  
4.1.1  
4.1.2  
4.1.3  
4.1.4  
4.1.5  
SECTION 5  
INTERRUPTS.................................................................29  
5.1  
5.2  
5.3  
5.4  
CPU INTERRUPT PROCESSING ........................................... 29  
RESET INTERRUPT SEQUENCE........................................... 32  
SOFTWARE INTERRUPT (SWI) ............................................. 32  
HARDWARE INTERRUPTS .................................................... 32  
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT (IRQ)............................................... 32  
IRQ CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (ICSR) $1F ............. 34  
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT TIMING...................................... 36  
16-BIT TIMER INTERRUPT..................................................... 37  
MDLC INTERRUPT.................................................................. 37  
SPI INTERRUPT...................................................................... 37  
8-BIT TIMER INTERRUPT....................................................... 38  
5.5  
5.5.1  
5.5.2  
5.6  
5.7  
5.8  
5.9  
SECTION 6  
RESETS..........................................................................39  
6.1  
6.2  
EXTERNAL RESET (RESET).................................................. 39  
INTERNAL RESETS ................................................................ 40  
POWER-ON RESET (POR)................................................ 40  
OPERATION IN STOP AND WAIT..................................... 40  
COMPUTER OPERATING PROPERLY RESET (COPR).. 42  
LOW-VOLTAGE RESET (LVR) .......................................... 43  
ILLEGAL ADDRESS........................................................... 44  
DISABLED STOP INSTRUCTION...................................... 44  
6.2.1  
6.2.2  
6.2.3  
6.2.4  
6.2.5  
6.2.6  
SECTION 7  
POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION........................................ 45  
7.1  
INTERNAL POWER SUPPLY.................................................. 45  
PRIMARY 5V REGULATOR............................................... 45  
SECONDARY REGULATOR.............................................. 45  
MISCELLANEOUS REGISTER ............................................... 46  
IGNS - Ignition status bit..................................................... 46  
OCE - Output compare enable ........................................... 46  
PDC - Power Down Control ................................................ 46  
POWER MODING.................................................................... 47  
REGULATOR CONTROL LOGIC ............................................ 49  
MASK OPTIONS................................................................. 50  
POWER SUPPLY CONFIGURATION ..................................... 53  
DECOUPLING RECOMMENDATIONS.............................. 53  
7.1.1  
7.1.2  
7.2  
7.2.1  
7.2.2  
7.2.3  
7.3  
7.4  
7.4.1  
7.5  
7.5.1  
MOTOROLA  
Page iv  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 8  
LOW-POWER MODES ..................................................57  
8.1  
8.1.1  
8.1.2  
STOP INSTRUCTION ..............................................................57  
STOP MODE.......................................................................57  
WAIT INSTRUCTION..........................................................59  
SECTION 9  
PARALLEL I/O...............................................................61  
9.1  
PORT A AND PORT C .............................................................61  
PORT A/C DATA REGISTERS ............................................61  
PORT A/C DATA DIRECTION REGISTER..........................62  
PORT A/C I/O PIN INTERRUPTS.......................................62  
PORT B ....................................................................................62  
PORT B DATA REGISTER ..................................................63  
PORT B DATA DIRECTION REGISTER .............................63  
PORT D AND PORT E .............................................................63  
PORT F.....................................................................................64  
PORT F DATA REGISTER ..................................................64  
PORT F DATA DIRECTION REGISTER..............................64  
9.1.1  
9.1.2  
9.1.3  
9.2  
9.2.1  
9.2.2  
9.3  
9.4  
9.4.1  
9.4.2  
SECTION 10  
A/D CONVERTER.........................................................65  
10.1  
ANALOG SECTION..................................................................65  
RATIOMETRIC CONVERSION ..........................................65  
10.1.1  
10.1.2  
10.1.3  
10.2  
10.3  
10.4  
10.5  
10.6  
10.7  
V
AND V  
...............................................................65  
REFH  
REFL  
ACCURACY AND PRECISION...........................................65  
CONVERSION PROCESS.......................................................65  
DIGITAL SECTION...................................................................65  
A/D STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER (ADSCR)..............66  
A/D DATA REGISTERS ...........................................................67  
A/D DURING WAIT MODE.......................................................68  
A/D DURING STOP MODE......................................................68  
SECTION 11  
16-BIT TIMER ...............................................................69  
11.1  
11.2  
11.3  
11.4  
COUNTER REGISTER - $18:$19, $1A:$1B.............................70  
OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER - $16:$17 ............................70  
INPUT CAPTURE REGISTER - $14:$15 .................................71  
TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (TCR) - $12.............................72  
ICIE - Input Capture Interrupt Enable..................................72  
OCIE - Output Compare Interrupt Enable ...........................72  
TOIE - Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable..............................72  
TON - Timer On...................................................................72  
IEDG - Input Edge...............................................................72  
OLVL - Output Level............................................................72  
TIMER STATUS REGISTER (TSR) - $13 ................................72  
ICF - Input Capture Flag......................................................73  
OCF - Output Compare Flag...............................................73  
TOF - Timer Overflow Flag..................................................73  
Bits 0-4 - Not used...............................................................73  
11.4.1  
11.4.2  
11.4.3  
11.4.4  
11.4.5  
11.4.6  
11.5  
11.5.1  
11.5.2  
11.5.3  
11.5.4  
MOTOROLA  
Page v  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
11.6  
11.7  
TIMER DURING WAIT MODE ................................................. 73  
TIMER DURING STOP MODE ................................................ 73  
SECTION 12  
CORE TIMER ................................................................75  
12.1  
CORE TIMER CTRL & STATUS REGISTER (CTCSR) $08.... 76  
CTOF - Core Timer Over Flow............................................ 76  
RTIF - Real Time Interrupt Flag.......................................... 76  
TOFE - Timer Over Flow Enable ........................................ 76  
RTIE - Real Time Interrupt Enable...................................... 76  
TOFC - Timer Over Flow Flag Clear................................... 76  
RTFC - Real Time Interrupt Flag Clear............................... 77  
RT1:RT0 - Real Time Interrupt Rate Select........................ 77  
COMPUTER OPERATING PROPERLY (COP) RESET.......... 77  
CORE TIMER COUNTER REGISTER (CTCR) $09 ................ 78  
TIMER DURING WAIT MODE ................................................. 78  
12.1.1  
12.1.2  
12.1.3  
12.1.4  
12.1.5  
12.1.6  
12.1.7  
12.2  
12.3  
12.4  
SECTION 13  
PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR......................................79  
13.1  
13.2  
13.2.1  
13.2.2  
13.3  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION................................................. 79  
REGISTERS............................................................................. 81  
PWM CONTROL................................................................. 81  
PWM DATA REGISTERS................................................... 82  
PWM DURING WAIT MODE.................................................... 82  
PWM DURING STOP MODE................................................... 82  
PWM DURING RESET ............................................................ 82  
13.4  
13.5  
SECTION 14  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE.............................83  
14.1  
SPI SIGNAL DESCRIPTION.................................................... 83  
Master In Slave Out (MISO/PF3)........................................ 84  
Master Out Slave In (MOSI/PF2)........................................ 84  
Serial Clock (SCK/PF1) ...................................................... 84  
Slave Select (SS/PF0) ........................................................ 85  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION................................................. 85  
SPI REGISTERS...................................................................... 87  
Serial Peripheral Control Register (SPCR)......................... 87  
Serial Peripheral Status Register (SPSR)........................... 88  
Serial Peripheral Data I/O Register (SPDR) ....................... 89  
SPI IN STOP MODE ............................................................... 90  
SPI IN WAIT MODE ................................................................. 90  
14.1.1  
14.1.2  
14.1.3  
14.1.4  
14.2  
14.3  
14.3.1  
14.3.2  
14.3.3  
14.4  
14.5  
SECTION 15  
MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER.......................91  
15.1  
OUTLINE.................................................................................. 92  
MDLC OPERATING MODES ............................................. 93  
MODE DESCRIPTIONS ..................................................... 93  
MDLC CPU INTERFACE ......................................................... 95  
OUTLINE ............................................................................ 95  
MDLC CONTROL REGISTER (MCR) $0E......................... 96  
MDLC STATUS REGISTER (MSR) $0F............................. 99  
15.1.1  
15.1.2  
15.2  
15.2.1  
15.2.2  
15.2.3  
MOTOROLA  
Page vi  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.2.4  
15.2.5  
15.3  
15.3.1  
15.3.2  
15.3.3  
15.4  
15.4.1  
15.4.2  
15.4.3  
15.5  
15.5.1  
15.5.2  
15.5.3  
15.5.4  
15.5.5  
15.6  
15.6.1  
15.6.2  
15.6.3  
15.7  
15.7.1  
15.7.2  
15.7.3  
15.7.4  
15.7.5  
15.7.6  
15.7.7  
MDLC TX CONTROL REGISTER (MTCR) $10................100  
MDLC RX STATUS REGISTER (MRSR) $11...................101  
MDLC Rx/Tx BUFFERS .........................................................103  
OUTLINE...........................................................................103  
RX BUFFERS....................................................................105  
TX BUFFER ......................................................................106  
MDLC PROTOCOL HANDLER ..............................................108  
OUTLINE...........................................................................108  
Rx & Tx SHIFT REGISTERS ............................................108  
STATE MACHINE .............................................................109  
MDLC MUX INTERFACE .......................................................112  
Rx DIGITAL FILTER..........................................................112  
J1850 FRAME FORMAT...................................................114  
J1850 VPW SYMBOLS.....................................................116  
J1850 VPW VALID/INVALID BITS & SYMBOLS ..............117  
MESSAGE ARBITRATION ...............................................121  
MDLC PHYSICAL INTERFACE .............................................123  
OUTLINE...........................................................................123  
MUX INTERFACE SIGNALS ............................................126  
PINS..................................................................................127  
MDLC APPLICATION NOTES ...............................................128  
INITIALIZATION................................................................128  
TRANSMITTING A MESSAGE .........................................128  
RECEIVING A MESSAGE ................................................128  
RECEIVING A MESSAGE IN BLOCK MODE...................129  
MDLC STOP MODE..........................................................130  
MDLC WAIT MODE ..........................................................130  
CONTROLLING EXTERNAL VOLTAGE  
REGULATORS................................................................130  
SECTION 16  
INSTRUCTION SET....................................................133  
16.1  
16.2  
16.3  
16.4  
16.5  
16.6  
16.6.1  
16.6.2  
16.6.3  
16.6.4  
16.6.5  
16.6.6  
16.6.7  
16.6.8  
16.6.9  
16.6.10  
REGISTER/MEMORY INSTRUCTIONS ................................133  
READ-MODIFY-WRITE INSTRUCTIONS..............................133  
BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS.....................................................134  
BIT MANIPULATION INSTRUCTIONS...................................134  
CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................135  
ADDRESSING MODES..........................................................135  
IMMEDIATE ......................................................................136  
DIRECT.............................................................................136  
EXTENDED.......................................................................136  
RELATIVE.........................................................................136  
INDEXED, NO OFFSET....................................................136  
INDEXED, 8-BIT OFFSET ................................................136  
INDEXED, 16-BIT OFFSET ..............................................137  
BIT SET/CLEAR................................................................137  
BIT TEST AND BRANCH..................................................137  
INHERENT........................................................................137  
MOTOROLA  
Page vii  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 17  
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS................................139  
17.1  
MAXIMUM RATINGS............................................................. 139  
THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS ........................................... 139  
DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS................................ 140  
REGULATOR ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS............... 141  
CONTROL TIMING ................................................................ 142  
A/D CONVERTER CHARACTERISTICS............................... 143  
DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS................................ 144  
CONTROL TIMING ................................................................ 145  
LVR TIMING DIAGRAM......................................................... 146  
SPI TIMING............................................................................ 147  
MDLC ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS............................... 150  
17.2  
17.3  
17.4  
17.5  
17.6  
17.7  
17.8  
17.9  
17.10  
17.11  
17.11.1  
17.11.2  
17.11.3  
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS ................................... 150  
OPERATING CONDITIONS ............................................. 150  
TRANSMITTER D.C. ELECTRICA  
CHARACTERISTICS...................................................... 150  
TRANSMITTER A.C. ELECTRICAL  
17.11.4  
CHARACTERISTICS...................................................... 151  
RECEIVER D.C. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ..... 151  
TRANSMITTER VPW SYMBOL TIMINGS ....................... 151  
RECEIVER VPW SYMBOL TIMINGS .............................. 152  
17.11.5  
17.11.6  
17.11.7  
SECTION 18  
05V7 BEHAVIOR DURING EMULATION....................155  
18.1  
18.2  
18.3  
COP........................................................................................ 155  
MDLC ..................................................................................... 155  
REGULATOR......................................................................... 155  
MOTOROLA  
Page viii  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
LIST OF FIGURES  
Figure 1-1:  
Figure 1-2:  
Figure 1-3:  
Figure 1-4:  
Figure 1-5:  
Figure 1-6:  
Figure 1-7:  
MC68HC05V7 Pin Assignments (56 pin package)................................3  
MC68HC05V7 Pin Assignments (68-pin PLCC package).....................4  
MC68HC05V7 Pin Assignments (64-pin QFP)......................................5  
MC68HC05V7 Bonding Diagram Circuit Side Up..................................6  
MC68HC05V7 Bonding Diagram Circuit Side Down.............................7  
MC68HC05V7 Block Diagram...............................................................8  
Oscillator Connections.........................................................................10  
Figure 2-1:  
Figure 2-2:  
Figure 2-3:  
Figure 2-4:  
Figure 2-5:  
Figure 2-6:  
MC68HC05V7 Single-Chip Mode Memory Map.................................13  
MC68HC05V7 I/O Registers Memory Map .........................................14  
MC68HC05V7 I/O Registers $0000-$000F.........................................16  
MC68HC05V7 I/O Registers $0010-$001F.........................................17  
MC68HC05V7 I/O Registers $0020-$002F.........................................18  
MC68HC05V7 I/O Registers $0030-$003F.........................................19  
Figure 3-1:  
Figure 4-1:  
Programming Register.........................................................................21  
MC68HC05 Programming Model ........................................................25  
Figure 5-1:  
Figure 5-2:  
Figure 5-3:  
Figure 5-4:  
Interrupt Processing Flowchart............................................................31  
IRQ Function Block Diagram...............................................................33  
IRQ Status & Control Register.............................................................35  
External Interrupts Timing Diagram.....................................................37  
Figure 6-1:  
Figure 6-2:  
Figure 6-3:  
Reset Block Diagram...........................................................................39  
RESET and POR Timing Diagram ......................................................41  
COP Watchdog Timer Location...........................................................43  
Figure 7-1:  
Figure 7-2:  
Figure 7-3:  
Figure 7-4:  
Figure 7-5:  
Figure 7-6:  
Figure 7-7:  
Miscellaneous Register .......................................................................46  
MC68HC05V7 Power Moding Flow Diagram ......................................48  
Regulator Startup ................................................................................49  
Using the 68HC05V7 with an External Regulator................................51  
Power Moding Block Diagram .............................................................52  
MC68HC05V7 On-chip Power Supply Configuration ..........................53  
HC705V8 Internal Power Routing .......................................................54  
Figure 8-1:  
Figure 8-2:  
Stop Recovery Timing Diagram...........................................................58  
STOP/WAIT Flowcharts.......................................................................59  
MOTOROLA  
Page ix  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
Figure 9-1:  
Figure 9-2:  
Figure 9-3:  
Port A and Port C I/O Circuitry............................................................ 61  
Port B I/O Circuitry .............................................................................. 63  
Port D and Port E Circuitry.................................................................. 64  
Figure 10-1:  
Figure 10-2:  
A/D Status and Control Register......................................................... 66  
A/D Data Register ............................................................................... 67  
Figure 11-1:  
Figure 11-2:  
Figure 11-3:  
Figure 11-4:  
16-Bit Timer Block Diagram ................................................................ 69  
Timer Control Register - $12............................................................... 72  
Timer Status Register - $13 ................................................................ 72  
TCAP Timing....................................................................................... 74  
Figure 12-1:  
Figure 12-2:  
Figure 12-3:  
Core Timer Block Diagram.................................................................. 75  
Core Timer Control and Status Register............................................. 76  
Timer Counter Register....................................................................... 78  
Figure 13-1:  
Figure 13-2:  
Figure 13-3:  
Figure 13-4:  
Figure 13-5:  
Figure 13-6:  
PWM Block Diagram........................................................................... 79  
PWM Waveform Examples (POL = 1)................................................. 80  
PWM Waveform Examples (POL = 0)................................................. 80  
PWM Write Sequences....................................................................... 81  
PWM Control Register ........................................................................ 81  
PWM Data Register ............................................................................ 82  
Figure 14-1:  
Figure 14-2:  
Figure 14-3:  
Figure 14-4:  
Figure 14-5:  
Figure 14-6:  
Data Clock Timing Diagram ................................................................ 84  
Serial Peripheral Interface Block Diagram .......................................... 86  
Serial Peripheral Interface Master-Slave Interconnection................... 87  
SPI Control Register (SPCR).............................................................. 87  
Serial Peripheral Rate Selection ......................................................... 88  
SPI Status Register (SPSR)................................................................ 88  
Figure 15-1:  
Figure 15-2:  
Figure 15-3:  
Figure 15-4:  
Figure 15-5:  
Figure 15-6:  
Figure 15-7:  
Figure 15-8:  
Figure 15-9:  
Figure 15-10:  
Figure 15-11:  
Figure 15-12:  
MDLC Operating Modes State Diagram ............................................. 93  
MDLC User Registers ......................................................................... 95  
MDLC Control Register (MCR) ........................................................... 96  
MDLC Status Register (MSR)............................................................. 99  
MDLC Tx Control Register (MTCR) .................................................. 100  
MDLC Rx Status Register (MRSR)................................................... 101  
MDLC Rx/Tx Buffers Outline............................................................. 105  
MDLC Protocol Handler Outline........................................................ 108  
MDLC Rx Digital Filter Block Diagram .............................................. 112  
J1850 Bus Message Format (VPW).................................................. 114  
J1850 VPW Symbols ........................................................................ 116  
J1850 VPW Passive Symbols........................................................... 118  
MOTOROLA  
Page x  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
Figure 15-13:  
Figure 15-14:  
Figure 15-15:  
Figure 15-16:  
J1850 VPW EOF and IFS Symbols...................................................119  
J1850 VPW Active Symbols..............................................................120  
J1850 VPW Bitwise Arbitration..........................................................121  
MDLC Physical Interface Outline.......................................................125  
Figure 17-1:  
Figure 17-2:  
Figure 17-3:  
Figure 17-4:  
Figure 17-5:  
Figure 17-6:  
SPI MASTER TIMING (CPHA = 0)....................................................148  
SPI MASTER TIMING (CPHA = 1)....................................................148  
SPI SLAVE TIMING (CPHA = 0).......................................................149  
SPI SLAVE TIMING (CPHA = 1).......................................................149  
Transmitter A.C. Electrical Characteristics........................................151  
Variable Pulse Width Modulation (VPW) Symbol Timings ................153  
MOTOROLA  
Page xi  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
MOTOROLA  
Page xii  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
LIST OF TABLES  
Table 3-1:  
Table 3-2:  
Erase Mode Select ..............................................................................22  
EEPROM Write/Erase Cycle Reduction..............................................23  
Table 5-1:  
Table 6-1:  
Table 10-1:  
Table 12-1:  
Table 13-1:  
Vector Address for Interrupts and Reset .............................................29  
COP Watchdog Timer Recommendations ..........................................43  
A/D Channel Assignments...................................................................67  
RTI and COP Rates at 2.1 MHz ..........................................................77  
PWM Clock Rate .................................................................................81  
Table 15-1:  
Table 15-2:  
Table 15-3:  
MDLC Transmit Abort Function Summary...........................................97  
MDLC Rate Selection..........................................................................98  
MDLC J1850 Bus Error Summary.....................................................111  
MOTOROLA  
Page xiii  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
MOTOROLA  
Page xiv  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 1  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
The Motorola MC68HC05V7 microcontroller is a custom HC05 based MCU featuring a  
Message Data Link Controller (MDLC) module and on-chip power regulation (ROM version  
of the MC68HC705V8). The device is available packaged in a 56-pin SDIP, 68-pin PLCC,  
or 64-pin QFP. A functional block diagram of the MC68HC05V7 is shown in Figure 1-6.  
1.1  
FEATURES  
• Low cost, HC05 Core  
• 10K Bytes of User ROM  
• 384 Bytes of User RAM  
• 128 Bytes of byte erasable EEPROM  
-
Byte writeable  
-
Byte, Block or Bulk erasable  
• Message Data Link Controller (MDLC) module  
• 16 channel 8-bit A/D converter (8 channels available in 56 SDIP version)  
• Full function Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)  
• On-Chip Oscillator for Crystal/Ceramic Resonator  
• 8-bit timer with Real Time Interrupt  
• 16-bit timer with 1 input capture and 1 output compare  
• 38 frequency 6-bit PWM  
• COP Watchdog System  
• 22 general purpose I/O pins, 16 with interrupt wake-up capability  
6 I/O pins muxed with Timer and SPI pins. 16 Input Only pins muxed with  
A/D.  
• Mask option Low Voltage Reset (LVR).  
• On-chip 5V MCU power regulator (mask option to disable)  
• Power Saving STOP and WAIT Mode Instructions  
(Mask Selectable STOP Instruction Disable)  
SECTION 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
MOTOROLA  
Page 1  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
NOTE: A line over a signal name indicates an active low signal. For example,  
RESET is active high and RESET is active low. Any reference to voltage,  
current, or frequency specified in the following sections will refer to the  
nominal values. The exact values and their tolerance or limits are  
specified in SECTION 17 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS.  
1.2  
MASK OPTIONS  
The following mask options are available:  
• Sensitivity on IRQ Interrupt, Edge- and Level-Sensitive or Edge-Sensitive  
Only  
• Selectable COP Watchdog System  
• Selectable Low Voltage Reset (LVR)  
• Selectable STOP Instruction Disable  
• Selectable on-chip power supply regulator  
• Selectable option to allow regulator wakeup on a rising edge of the MDLC  
Bus  
• Selectable option to tie the regulator output to V  
when turned off  
SS  
1.3  
PIN ASSIGNMENTS  
The MC68HC05V7 requires 64 bond pads for all I/O and power supply functions. The  
device is available in a 56-pin SDIP package where the 8 A/D channels associated with  
Port E are not bonded out (AN8 thru AN15). The device is also available in the 68 pin PLCC  
and 64 pin QFP packages.  
The pin out for the 56-pin SDIP, the 68-pin PLCC, and the 64-pin QFP packages are shown  
in the following figures. The pad positions are also in the following figures.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 2  
SECTION 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
.
PWM  
PA7  
PA6  
PA5  
PA4  
PA3  
PA2  
PA1  
PA0  
PC7  
PC6  
PC5  
PC4  
PC3  
PC2  
PC1  
PC0  
1
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
32  
31  
30  
29  
V
V
OSC2  
OSC1  
RST  
SSD  
2
DD  
3
4
5
6
IRQ  
7
PF3/MISO  
PF2/MOSI  
PF1/SCLK  
PF0/SS  
PB0  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
PB1  
PB2  
PB3  
PB4  
PB5  
PB6/TCMP  
PB7/TCAP  
PD7/AN7  
PD6/AN6  
PD5/AN5  
PD4/AN4  
PD3/AN3  
V
SSA2  
LOAD  
BUS  
V
BATT  
REXT2  
REXT1  
V
REFL  
V
SSA1  
V
V
V
V
IGN  
CCA  
V
DD  
REFH  
PD2/AN2  
PD1/AN1  
SSD  
PD0/AN0  
Note:This pin assignment is subject to change  
Figure 1-1: MC68HC05V7 Pin Assignments (56-pin package)  
SECTION 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
MOTOROLA  
Page 3  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
Pin numbers  
60 PC7  
59 PC6  
58 PC5  
57 PC4  
56 PC3  
55 PC2  
54 PC1  
53 PC0  
PF3/MISO 10  
PF2/MOSI 11  
PF1/SCLK 12  
PF0/SS 13  
PB0 14  
PB1 15  
PB2 16  
PB3 17  
52 PE7/AN15  
51 PE6/AN14  
50 PE5/AN13  
49 PE4/AN12  
48 PD7/AN7  
47 PD6/AN6  
46 PD5/AN5  
45 PD4/AN4  
44 PD3/AN3  
PB4 18  
PB5 19  
PB6/TCMP 20  
PB7/TCAP 21  
V
22  
SSA2  
LOAD 23  
BUS 24  
V
25  
BATT  
N.C. 26  
Figure 1-2: MC68HC05V7 Pin Assignments (68-pin PLCC package)  
MOTOROLA  
Page 4  
SECTION 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
Pin numbers  
48 PC6  
PF3/MISO  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
PC5  
PC4  
PC3  
PC2  
PC1  
PC0  
PE7/AN15  
PE6/AN14  
PE5/AN13  
PE4/AN12  
PD7/AN7  
PD6/AN6  
PD5/AN5  
PD4/AN4  
PD3/AN3  
PF2/MOSI  
PF1/SCLK  
PF0/SS  
PB0  
PB1  
PB2  
PB3  
PB4  
PB5 10  
PB6/TCMP 11  
PB7/TCAP 12  
V
13  
SSA2  
LOAD 14  
BUS 15  
V
16  
BATT  
Figure 1-3: MC68HC05V7 Pin Assignments (64-pin QFP)  
SECTION 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
MOTOROLA  
Page 5  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
PF3/MISO  
PF2/MOSI  
PF1/SCLK  
PF0/SS  
PB0  
PC7  
PC6  
PC5  
PC4  
PC3  
PB1  
PC2  
PB2  
PC1  
PB3  
PC0  
PE7/AN15  
PE6/AN14  
PE5/AN13  
PE4/AN12  
PD7/AN7  
PD6/AN6  
PD5/AN5  
PD4/AN4  
PD3/AN3  
PB4  
PB5  
PB6/TCMP  
PB7/TCAP  
V
SSA2  
LOAD  
BUS  
V
BATT  
Figure 1-4: MC68HC05V7 Bonding Diagram  
Circuit Side Up  
MOTOROLA  
Page 6  
SECTION 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
PF3/MISO  
PF2/MOSI  
PF1/SCLK  
PF0/SS  
PB0  
PC7  
PC6  
PC5  
PC4  
PC3  
PB1  
PC2  
PB2  
PC1  
PC0  
PB3  
PE7/AN15  
PE6/AN14  
PE5/AN13  
PE4/AN12  
PD7/AN7  
PD6/AN6  
PD5/AN5  
PD4/AN4  
PD3/AN3  
PB4  
PB5  
PB6/TCMP  
PB7/TCAP  
V
SSA2  
LOAD  
BUS  
V
BATT  
Figure 1-5: MC68HC05V7 Bonding Diagram  
Circuit Side Down  
SECTION 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
MOTOROLA  
Page 7  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
1.4  
MCU STRUCTURE  
The overall block diagram of the MC68HC05V7 is shown in Figure 1-6.  
PF3/MISO  
PF2/MOSI  
PF1/SCLK  
PF0/SS  
OSC 1  
OSCILLATOR  
÷2  
OSC 2  
SPI  
PC7 *  
PC6 *  
PC5 *  
PC4 *  
PC3 *  
PC2 *  
PC1 *  
PC0 *  
RESET  
WATCHDOG  
ALU  
IRQ  
CPU CONTROL  
AD0/PD0  
68HC05 CPU  
AD1/PD1  
AD2/PD2  
AD3/PD3  
AD4/PD4  
AD5/PD5  
AD6/PD6  
AD7/PD7  
ACCUM  
CPU REGISTERS  
INDEX REG  
PB7/TCAP  
PB6/TCMP  
PB5  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 STK PTR  
1
PROGRAM COUNTER  
PB4  
PB3  
V
COND CODE REG 1 1 1 H I N Z C  
REFH  
V
PB2  
REFL  
PB1  
AD8/PE0  
AD9/PE1  
PB0  
SRAM -384 BYTES  
AD10/PE2  
AD11/PE3  
AD12/PE4  
AD13/PE5  
AD14/PE6  
AD15/PE7  
PA7 *  
PA6 *  
PA5 *  
PA4 *  
PA3 *  
PA2 *  
PA1 *  
PA0 *  
USER ROM -10K BYTES  
EEPROM -128 BYTES  
8-BIT TIMER with RTI  
E not bonded out  
-pin SDIP  
16-BIT TIMER with  
1 IPC & 1 OPC  
V
SSA1  
1 Channel  
38 frequency, 6-bit PWM  
PWM  
BUS  
Interrupt  
MDLC  
Internal  
LOAD  
REXT1  
REXT2  
LVR  
V
DD  
V
BATT  
MCU POWER SUPPLY  
REGULATION  
V
IGN  
CLKIN  
V
V
SSA2  
CCA  
To A/D  
V
CC  
V
DD  
V
DD  
V
SSD  
V
SSD  
* IRQ Interrupt Capability  
Figure 1-6: MC68HC05V7 Block Diagram  
MOTOROLA  
Page 8  
SECTION 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
1.5  
FUNCTIONAL PIN DESCRIPTION  
The following paragraphs give a description of the general function of each pin.  
1.5.1  
Power is supplied to the device through the V  
V
BATT  
pin. The on-chip voltage regulator uses  
BATT  
this voltage to derive the internal V supply for the MCU. The V  
pin is also used to  
DD  
BATT  
power the MDLC and should still be connected even when the Voltage Regulator is not  
used. See SECTION 7 POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION.  
1.5.2  
V
AND V  
DD SS  
These pins are provided to allow the internally generated V  
supply to be externally  
DD  
decoupled. The short rise and fall times of the MCU supply current transients place very  
high short-duration current demands on the internal power supply. To prevent noise  
problems, special care should be taken to provide good power supply bypassing at the  
MCU by using bypass capacitors with good high-frequency characteristics that are  
positioned as close to the MCU supply pins as possible. Two sets of V and V pins are  
DD  
SS  
required to maintain on-chip supply noise to within acceptable limits. Each supply pin pair  
will require its own decoupling capacitor. See SECTION 7 POWER SUPPLY AND  
REGULATION.  
1.5.3  
V
SSA1  
V
is a separate ground pad, which provides a ground return for the A/D subsystem. To  
SSA1  
prevent digital noise contamination, this pin should be connected directly to a low  
impedance ground reference point.  
1.5.4  
V
SSA2  
V
is a separate ground pad, which provides a ground return for the MDLC analog  
SSA2  
subsystem. To prevent digital noise contamination, this pin should be connected directly to  
a low impedance ground reference point.  
1.5.5  
V
CCA  
V
is a separate supply pin providing power to the analog subsystems of the MDLC and  
CCA  
A/D converter. This pin should be connected to the V  
pin externally. To prevent  
DD  
contamination from the digital supply, this pin should be adequately decoupled to a low  
impedance ground reference. See SECTION 7 POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION.  
1.5.6  
V
AND V  
REFH REFL  
V
is the positive (high) reference voltage for the A/D subsystem. V  
is the negative  
REFH  
REFL  
(low) reference voltage for the A/D subsystem. V  
and V  
should be isolated from  
REFH  
REFL  
the digital supplies to prevent any loss of accuracy from the A/D converter.  
SECTION 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
MOTOROLA  
Page 9  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
1.5.7 OSC1, OSC2  
The OSC1 and OSC2 pins are the connections for the on-chip oscillator. OSC1 is the input  
to the oscillator inverter. The output (OSC2) will always reflect OSC1 inverted except when  
the device is in STOP mode, which forces OSC2 high. The OSC1, and OSC2 pins can  
accept the following sets of components:  
1. A crystal as shown in Figure 1-7(a)  
2. A ceramic resonator as shown in Figure 1-7(a)  
3. An external clock signal as shown in Figure 1-7(b)  
The frequency, f  
, of the oscillator or external clock source is divided by two to produce  
OSC  
the internal operating frequency, f .  
OP  
1.5.7.1  
Crystal Oscillator  
The circuit in Figure 1-7(a) shows a typical oscillator circuit for an AT-cut, parallel resonant  
crystal. The crystal manufacturer’s recommendations should be followed, as the crystal  
parameters determine the external component values required to provide maximum  
stability and reliable start-up. The load capacitance values used in the oscillator circuit  
design should include all stray capacitances. The crystal and components should be  
mounted as close as possible to the pins for start-up stabilization and to minimize output  
distortion and radiated emissions.  
MCU  
MCU  
OSC1  
OSC2  
OSC1  
OSC2  
unconnected  
External Clock  
(a) Crystal or  
Ceramic Resonator  
Connections  
(b)External  
Clock Source  
Connection  
Figure 1-7: Oscillator Connections  
Ceramic Resonator Oscillator  
1.5.7.2  
In cost-sensitive applications, a ceramic resonator can be used in place of the crystal. The  
circuit in Figure 1-7(a) is for a ceramic resonator. The resonator manufacturer’s  
recommendations should be followed, as the resonator parameters determine the external  
component values required for maximum stability and reliable starting. The load  
capacitance values used in the oscillator circuit design should include all stray  
capacitances. The ceramic resonator and components should be mounted as close as  
possible to the pins for start-up stabilization and to minimize output distortion and radiated  
emissions.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 10  
SECTION 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
1.5.7.3  
External Clock  
An external clock from another CMOS-compatible device can be connected to the OSC1  
input. The OSC2 pin should be left unconnected, as shown in Figure 1-7(b).  
1.5.8  
RESET  
This pin can be used as an input to reset the MCU to a known start-up state by pulling it to  
the low state. The RESET pin contains an internal Schmitt trigger to improve its noise  
immunity as an input. The RESET pin has an internal pulldown device that pulls the RESET  
pin low when there is an internal COP Watchdog reset, POR, illegal address reset, a  
disabled STOP instruction reset, or an internal low voltage reset. Refer to SECTION 6  
RESETS.  
1.5.9  
IRQ (MASKABLE INTERRUPT REQUEST)  
This input pin drives the asynchronous IRQ interrupt function of the CPU. The IRQ interrupt  
function has a mask option to select either negative edge-sensitive triggering or both  
negative edge-sensitive and low level-sensitive triggering. The IRQ input requires an  
external resistor to V for “wire-OR” operation, if desired. If the IRQ pin is not used, it must  
DD  
be tied to the V supply. The IRQ pin contains an internal Schmitt trigger as part of its input  
DD  
to improve noise immunity. Each of the PA0 thru PA7 and PC0 thru PC7 I/O pins may be  
connected as an OR function with the IRQ interrupt function. This capability allows  
keyboard scan applications where the transitions on the I/O pins will behave the same as  
the IRQ pin. The edge or level sensitivity selected by a mask option for the IRQ pin does  
not apply to the I/O pin interrupt. The I/O pin interrupt is always negative edge sensitive.  
See SECTION 5 INTERRUPTS for more details on the interrupts.  
1.5.10  
PA0-PA7  
These eight I/O lines comprise Port A. The state of any pin is software programmable and  
all Port A lines are configured as inputs during power-on or reset. All eight pins are  
connected via an internal gate to the IRQ interrupt function. When the IRQ interrupt function  
is enabled, all the Port A pins will act as negative edge sensitive IRQ sources. See  
SECTION 9 PARALLEL I/O for more details on the I/O ports.  
1.5.11  
PB0-PB5, PB6/TCMP, PB7/TCAP  
These eight I/O lines comprise Port B. The state of any pin is software programmable and  
all Port B lines are configured as inputs during power-on or reset. See SECTION 9  
PARALLEL I/O for more details on the I/O ports. PB6 and PB7 are also shared with timer  
functions. The TCAP pin controls the input capture feature for the on-chip 16-bit timer. The  
TCMP pin provides an output for the output compare feature of the on-chip 16-bit timer. See  
SECTION 11 16-BIT TIMER for more details on the operation of the timer subsystem.  
1.5.12  
PC0-PC7  
These eight I/O lines comprise Port C. The state of any pin is software programmable and  
all Port C lines are configured as inputs during power-on or reset. All eight pins are  
connected via an internal gate to the IRQ interrupt function. When the IRQ interrupt function  
SECTION 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
MOTOROLA  
Page 11  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
is enabled, all the Port C pins will act as negative edge sensitive IRQ sources. See  
SECTION 9 PARALLEL I/O for more details on the I/O ports.  
1.5.13  
AD0-AD7 / PD0-PD7: AD8-AD15/PE0-PE7  
When the A/D converter is disabled, PD0-PD7 and PE0-PE7 are general purpose input  
pins. The A/D converter is disabled upon exiting from reset. When the A/D converter is  
enabled, one of these pins is the analog input to the A/D converter. The A/D control register  
contains control bits to direct which of the analog inputs are to be converted at any one  
time. A digital read of this pin when the A/D converter is enabled results in a read of logical  
zero from the selected analog pin. A digital read of the remaining pins gives their correct  
(digital) values. A/D inputs AD8-AD15 (Port E) are not bonded out in the 56-pin package.  
See SECTION 10 A/D CONVERTER for more details on the operation of the A/D  
subsystem.  
1.5.14  
PWM  
This pin provides an output for the pulse width modulation feature of the on-chip  
programmable timer. See SECTION 13 PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR for more details on  
the operation of the PWM subsystem.  
1.5.15  
PF0/SS, PF1/SCK, PF2/MOSI, PF3/MISO  
These four I/O lines comprise Port F. The state of any pin is software programmable and  
all Port F lines are configured as inputs during power-on or reset. See SECTION 9  
PARALLEL I/O for more details on the I/O ports. When the SPI subsystem is enabled, PF0-  
PF3 become the data, clock and select lines for the SPI. See SECTION 14 SERIAL  
PERIPHERAL INTERFACE for more details on the operation of the SPI subsystem.  
1.5.16  
BUS, LOAD, REXT1, REXT2  
These pins provide the I/O interface and external biasing functions for the MDLC  
subsystem. See SECTION 15 MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER for more details on  
the operation of the MDLC subsystem. The regulator control logic monitors the BUS pin and  
latches a rising edge to re-enable the primary voltage regulator if this mask option is  
enabled.  
1.5.17  
V
IGN  
The V  
pin is used by the internal voltage regulator power moding circuitry to indicate that  
IGN  
the regulator should power up. Its state is reflected in the IGNS bit of the MISC register.  
The input voltage levels on this pin are ratioed to the voltage on V . See the electrical  
BATT  
specifications. A smaller secondary regulator remains alive to power the V  
pin logic  
IGN  
when the primary voltage regulator is powered down, allowing the power moding logic to  
recognize and latch a rising edge on this pin and re-enable the primary regulator (power-  
up). See SECTION 7 POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION for a more detailed  
description.  
The V  
pin has no function when the option to disable the on-chip voltage regulator is  
IGN  
selected and should be tied low.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 12  
SECTION 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 2  
MEMORY MAP  
2.1  
SINGLE-CHIP MODE MEMORY MAP  
When the MC68HC05V7 is in the Single-Chip Mode the I/O and peripherals, user RAM,  
EEPROM and user ROM are all active as shown in Figure 2-1.  
$0000  
0000  
$0000  
I/O  
64 Bytes  
I/O  
Registers  
$003F  
$0040  
0063  
0064  
64 bytes  
(see Figure 2-  
2)  
User RAM  
(128 Bytes)  
$00BF  
$00C0  
0191  
0192  
Stack  
(64 Bytes)  
$003F  
$00FF  
$0100  
0255  
0256  
User RAM  
192 Bytes  
$01BF  
$01C0  
0447  
0448  
COP Watchdog Timer  
unused  
$3FF0  
$3FF1  
$3FF2  
$3FF3  
$3FF4  
$3FF5  
$3FF6  
$3FF7  
Unused  
128 Bytes  
0575  
0576  
$023F  
$0240  
8-Bit Timer (High Byte)  
8-Bit Timer (Low Byte)  
SPI (High Byte)  
User EEPROM  
128 Bytes  
0703  
0704  
$02BF  
$02C0  
Unused  
4928 Bytes  
SPI (Low Byte)  
$15FF  
$1600  
5631  
5632  
MDLC (High Byte)  
MDLC (Low Byte)  
2
Selfcheck/E test  
ROM 512 Byes  
16-Bit Timer Vector (High Byte) $3FF8  
16-Bit Timer Vector (Low Byte) $3FF9  
$17FF  
$1800  
6143  
6144  
User ROM  
10208 Bytes  
IRQ Vector (High Byte)  
IRQ Vector (Low Byte)  
SWI Vector (High Byte)  
SWI Vector (Low Byte)  
Reset Vector (High Byte)  
Reset Vector (Low Byte)  
$3FFA  
$3FFB  
$3FFC  
$3FFD  
$3FFE  
$3FFF  
$3FDF  
$3FE0  
16351  
16352  
Selfcheck Vectors  
ROM 16 Bytes  
$3FEF  
$3FF0  
16367  
16368  
User Vectors ROM  
16 Bytes  
$3FFF  
16383  
Figure 2-1: MC68HC05V7 Single-Chip Mode Memory Map  
2.2  
I/O AND CONTROL REGISTERS  
The I/O and Control Registers reside in locations $0000-$003F. The overall organization of  
these registers is shown in Figure 2-2. The bit assignments for each register are shown in  
SECTION 2: MEMORY MAP  
MOTOROLA  
Page 13  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
Figure 2-3, Figure 2-4, Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6. Reading from unimplemented bits will  
return unknown states, and writing to unimplemented bits will be ignored.  
MDLC Tx Data Register 0  
Port A Data Register  
Port B Data Register  
Port C Data Register  
Port D Data Register  
$0000  
$0020  
MDLC Tx Data Register 1  
MDLC Tx Data Register 2  
MDLC Tx Data Register 3  
MDLC Tx Data Register 4  
MDLC Tx Data Register 5  
MDLC Tx Data Register 6  
$0001  
$0002  
$0003  
$0004  
$0005  
$0006  
$0007  
$0021  
$0022  
$0023  
$0024  
$0025  
$0026  
$0027  
Port A Data Direction Register  
Port B Data Direction Register  
Port C Data Direction Register  
MDLC Tx Data Register 7  
MDLC Tx Data Register 8  
MDLC Tx Data Register 9  
MDLC Tx Data Register 10  
Port E Data Register  
Unused  
8-Bit Timer Status & Control  
8-Bit Timer Counter Register  
SPI Control Register  
$0008  
$0028  
$0009  
$000A  
$000B  
$000C  
$000D  
$000E  
$000F  
$0029  
$002A  
$002B  
$002C  
$002D  
$002E  
$002F  
SPI Status Register  
SPI Data Register  
Unused  
Port F Data Register  
Unused  
Port F Data Direction Register  
MDLC Control Register  
Miscellaneous Register  
MDLC Status Register  
MDLC Tx Control Register  
PWM Data Register  
PWM Control Register  
Unused  
$0010  
$0030  
$0031  
$0032  
$0033  
$0034  
$0035  
$0036  
$0037  
$0038  
MDLC Rx Status Register  
16-Bit Timer Control Register  
16-Bit Timer Status Register  
$0011  
$0012  
$0013  
$0014  
$0015  
$0016  
$0017  
$0018  
Unused  
MDLC Rx Data Register 0  
MDLC Rx Data Register 1  
MDLC Rx Data Register 2  
MDLC Rx Data Register 3  
Input Capture Register (high)  
Input Capture Register (low)  
Output Compare Register (high)  
Output Compare Register (low)  
MDLC Rx Data Register 4  
MDLC Rx Data Register 5  
16 Bit Timer Count Register (high)  
16 Bit Timer Count Register (low)  
$0019  
$001A  
$001B  
$001C  
$001D  
$001E  
$001F  
$0039  
$003A  
$003B  
$003C  
$003D  
$003E  
$003F  
MDLC Rx Data Register 6  
MDLC Rx Data Register 7  
Alt. Count Register (high)  
Alt. Count Register (low)  
EEPROM Program Register  
MDLC Rx Data Register 8  
MDLC Rx Data Register 9  
A/D Data Register  
MDLC Rx Data Register10  
Reserved  
A/D Status & Control Register  
IRQ Control and Status Register  
Figure 2-2: MC68HC05V7 I/O Registers Memory Map  
2.3  
RAM  
The total RAM consists of 384 bytes (including the stack). The stack begins at address  
$00FF and proceeds down to $00C0 (64 bytes). Using the stack area for data storage or  
temporary work locations requires care to prevent it from being overwritten due to stacking  
from an interrupt or subroutine call.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 14  
SECTION 2: MEMORY MAP  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
NOTE: The stack is located in the middle of the RAM address space. Data written  
to addresses within the stack address range could be overwritten during  
stack activity.  
2.4  
ROM  
There are a total of 10752 bytes of user ROM on chip. This includes 10208 bytes of user  
ROM for user program storage, 512 bytes of EEPROM test and selfcheck ROM, 16 bytes  
of selfcheck vectors and 16 bytes for user vectors and the COP update location.  
2.5  
EEPROM  
This device contains 128 bytes of EEPROM. Programming the EEPROM is performed by  
the user on a single-byte basis by manipulating the Programming Register, located at  
address $001C. Refer to SECTION 3 EEPROM for programming details.  
SECTION 2: MEMORY MAP  
MOTOROLA  
Page 15  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
READ  
WRITE  
ADDR  
REGISTER  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R
$0000 PORT A DATA  
PA7  
PB7  
PA6  
PB6  
PA5  
PB5  
PA4  
PB4  
PA3  
PB3  
PA2  
PB2  
PA1  
PB1  
PA0  
PB0  
W
R
$0001 PORT B DATA  
W
R
$0002 PORT C DATA  
PC7  
PC6  
PC5  
PC4  
PC3  
PC2  
PC1  
PC0  
W
R
$0003 PORT D DATA  
PD7  
PD6  
PD5  
PD4  
PD3  
PD2  
PD1  
PD0  
W
R
$0004 PORT A DATA DIRECTION  
$0005 PORT B DATA DIRECTION  
$0006 PORT C DATA DIRECTION  
$0007 UNUSED  
DDRA7  
DDRB7  
DDRC7  
DDRA6  
DDRB6  
DDRC6  
DDRA5  
DDRB5  
DDRC5  
DDRA4  
DDRB4  
DDRC4  
DDRA3  
DDRB3  
DDRC3  
DDRA2  
DDRB2  
DDRC2  
DDRA1  
DDRB1  
DDRC1  
DDRA0  
DDRB0  
DDRC0  
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
CTOF  
D7  
RTIF  
D6  
$0008 8 BIT TIMER STATUS/CONTROL  
$0009 8 BIT TIMER COUNTER  
$000A SPI CONTROL REGISTER  
$000B SPI STATUS REGISTER  
$000C SPI DATA REGISTER  
$000D UNUSED  
TOFE  
D5  
RTIE  
D4  
RT1  
D1  
RT0  
D0  
W
R
TOFC  
D3  
RTFC  
D2  
W
R
SPIE  
SPIF  
SPE  
MSTR  
MODF  
CPOL  
SPD3  
CPHA  
SPD2  
SPR1  
SPD1  
IE  
SPR0  
W
R
WCOL  
W
R
SPD7  
SPD6  
TXAB  
SPD5  
R1  
SPD4  
R0  
SPD0  
WCM  
W
R
W
R
$000E MDLC CONTROL REGISTER  
$000F MDLC STATUS REGISTER  
RXBM  
W
R
TXMS  
RXMS  
W
UNIMPLEMENTED  
ONE TIME WRITE  
Figure 2-3: MC68HC05V7 I/O Registers $0000-$000F  
MOTOROLA  
Page 16  
SECTION 2: MEMORY MAP  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
READ  
WRITE  
ADDR  
REGISTER  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R
W
R
$0010 MDLC TX CONTROL REGISTER  
$0011 MDLC RX STATUS REGISTER  
$0012 TIMER CONTROL REGISTER  
$0013 TIMER STATUS REGISTER  
$0014 INPUT CAPTURE HIGH  
$0015 INPUT CAPTURE LOW  
$0016 OUTPUT COMPARE HIGH  
$0017 OUTPUT COMPARE LOW  
$0018 TIMER COUNTER HIGH  
$0019 TIMER COUNTER LOW  
$001A ALT. COUNTER HIGH  
TC3  
RC3  
TC2  
RC2  
TON  
TC1  
RC1  
TC0  
RC0  
W
R
ICIE  
ICF  
OCIE  
OCF  
TOIE  
TOF  
IEDG  
OLVL  
W
R
W
R
15  
7
14  
6
13  
5
12  
4
11  
3
10  
2
9
1
8
0
W
R
W
R
15  
7
14  
6
13  
5
12  
4
11  
3
10  
2
9
8
W
R
1
9
0
W
R
15  
7
14  
13  
5
12  
4
11  
3
10  
8
W
R
6
2
1
0
W
R
15  
14  
13  
12  
4
11  
3
10  
9
8
0
W
R
$001B ALT. COUNTER LOW  
7
6
5
2
1
W
R
$001C EEPROM PROGRAMMING  
$001D A/D DATA  
CPEN  
D6  
ER1  
D4  
CH4  
ER0  
D3  
LATCH  
D2  
CH2  
EERC  
D1  
CH1  
EEPGM  
D0  
W
R
D7  
D5  
W
R
COCO  
$001E A/D STATUS AND CONTROL  
$001F IRQ CONTROL AND STATUS  
ADRC  
ADON  
CH3  
CH0  
0
W
R
IRQF  
IRQPAF IRQPCF  
IRQE  
IRQPAE IRQPCE  
W
IRQA  
UNIMPLEMENTED  
ONE TIME WRITE  
Figure 2-4: MC68HC05V7 I/O Registers $0010-$001F  
SECTION 2: MEMORY MAP  
MOTOROLA  
Page 17  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
READ  
WRITE  
ADDR  
REGISTER  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R
$0020 MDLC TX DATA REGISTER 0  
$0021 MDLC TX DATA REGISTER 1  
$0022 MDLC TX DATA REGISTER 2  
$0023 MDLC TX DATA REGISTER 3  
$0024 MDLC TX DATA REGISTER 4  
$0025 MDLC TX DATA REGISTER 5  
$0026 MDLC TX DATA REGISTER 6  
$0027 MDLC TX DATA REGISTER 7  
$0028 MDLC TX DATA REGISTER 8  
$0029 MDLC TX DATA REGISTER 9  
$002A MDLC TX DATA REGISTER 10  
$002B PORT E DATA  
W
R
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D0  
D0  
D0  
D0  
D0  
D0  
D0  
D0  
D0  
D0  
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
PE7  
PE6  
PE5  
PE4  
PE3  
PE2  
PE1  
PE0  
W
R
$002C PORT F DATA  
PF3  
PF2  
PF1  
PF0  
W
R
$002D UNUSED  
W
R
$002E PORT F DATA DIRECTION  
$002F MISCELLANEOUS  
DDRF3  
DDRF2  
DDRF1  
DDRF0  
W
R
IGNS  
OCE  
PDC  
W
Figure 2-5: MC68HC05V7 I/O Registers $0020-$002F  
MOTOROLA  
Page 18  
SECTION 2: MEMORY MAP  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
READ  
WRITE  
ADDR  
REGISTER  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R
$0030 PWM DATA  
POL  
PSA1  
PSA0  
D5  
D4  
D3  
PSB3  
D2  
PSB2  
D1  
PSB1  
D0  
PSB0  
W
R
$0031 PWM CONTROL  
W
R
$0032 UNUSED  
W
R
$0033 UNUSED  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
W
R
D7  
$0034 MDLC RX DATA REGISTER 0  
$0035 MDLC RX DATA REGISTER 1  
$0036 MDLC RX DATA REGISTER 2  
$0037 MDLC RX DATA REGISTER 3  
$0038 MDLC RX DATA REGISTER 4  
$0039 MDLC RX DATA REGISTER 5  
$003A MDLC RX DATA REGISTER 6  
$003B MDLC RX DATA REGISTER 7  
$003C MDLC RX DATA REGISTER 8  
$003D MDLC RX DATA REGISTER 9  
$003E MDLC RX DATA REGISTER 10  
$003F RESERVED  
W
R
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D3  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D2  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D1  
D0  
D0  
D0  
D0  
D0  
D0  
D0  
D0  
D0  
D0  
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
UNIMPLEMENTED  
Figure 2-6: MC68HC05V7 I/O Registers $0030-$003F  
SECTION 2: MEMORY MAP  
MOTOROLA  
Page 19  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
MOTOROLA  
Page 20  
SECTION 2: MEMORY MAP  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 3  
EEPROM  
The MC68HC05V7 contains EEPROM memory. This section describes the programming  
mechanisms.  
3.1  
EEPROM PROGRAMMING REGISTER $1C  
The contents and use of the programming register are discussed below.  
$1C  
-
CPEN  
0
-
ER1  
0
ER0  
0
LATCH EERC EEPGM  
RESET:  
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 3-1: Programming Register  
NOTE: Any reset including LVR will abort any write in progress when it is  
asserted. Data written to the addressed byte will therefore be  
indeterminate.  
3.1.1  
CPEN - Charge Pump Enable  
When set, CPEN enables the charge pump which produces the internal programming  
voltage. This bit should be set with the LATCH bit. The programming voltage will not be  
available until EEPGM is set. The charge pump should be disabled when not in use. CPEN  
is readable and writable and is cleared by reset.  
3.1.2  
ER1:ER0 - Erase Select Bits  
ER1 and ER0 form a 2-bit field which is used to select one of three erase modes: byte,  
block, or bulk. Table 3-1 shows the modes selected for each bit configuration. These bits  
are readable and writable and are cleared by reset.  
In byte erase mode, only the selected byte is erased. In block mode, a 32-byte block of  
EEPROM is erased. The EEPROM memory space is divided into four 32-byte blocks  
($0240-$025F, $0260-$027F, $0280-$029F, $02A0-$02BF), and doing a block erase to  
any address within a block will erase the entire block. In bulk erase mode, the entire 128  
byte EEPROM section is erased.  
SECTION 3: EPROM and EEPROM  
MOTOROLA  
Page 21  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
Table 3-1: Erase Mode Select  
ER1  
ER0  
MODE  
0
0
1
0
1
0
No Erase  
Byte Erase  
Block Erase  
1
1
Bulk Erase  
3.1.3  
LATCH  
When set, LATCH configures the EEPROM address and data bus for programming. When  
LATCH is set, writes to the EEPROM array cause the data bus and the address bus to be  
latched. This bit is readable and writable, but reads from the array are inhibited if the  
LATCH bit is set and a write to the EEPROM space has taken place. When clear, address  
and data buses are configured for normal operation. Reset clears this bit.  
3.1.4  
When this bit is set, the EEPROM section uses the internal RC oscillator instead of the CPU  
clock. After setting the EERC bit, delay a time t  
to allow the RC oscillator to stabilize.  
EERC - EEPROM RC Oscillator Control  
RCON  
This bit is readable and writable and should be set by the user when the internal bus  
frequency falls below 1.5 MHz. Reset clears this bit.  
3.1.5  
EEPGM - EEPROM Programming Power Enable  
EEPGM must be written to enable (or disable) the EEPGM function. When set, EEPGM  
turns on the charge pump and enables the programming (or erasing) power to the  
EEPROM array. When clear, this power is switched off. This will enable pulsing of the  
programming voltage to be controlled internally. This bit can be read at any time, but can  
only be written to if LATCH=1. If LATCH is not set, then EEPGM cannot be set. Reset clears  
this bit.  
3.1.6  
To program a byte of EEPROM, set LATCH = CPEN = 1, set ER1 = ER0 = 0, write data to  
the desired address, and then set EEPGM for a time t  
PROGRAMMING/ERASING PROCEDURES  
.
EEPGM  
In general, all bits should be erased before being programmed. However, if write/erase  
cycling is a concern, a procedure can be followed to minimize the cycling of each bit in each  
EEPROM byte. The erased state is 1; therefore, if any bits within the byte need to be  
changed from a 0 to a 1, the byte must be erased before programming. The decision  
MOTOROLA  
Page 22  
SECTION 3: EPROM and EEPROM  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
whether to erase a byte before programming is summarized in Table 3-2.  
Table 3-2: EEPROM Write/Erase Cycle Reduction  
EEPROM Data To Be  
Programmed  
EEPROM Data Before  
Programming  
Erase Before  
Programming?  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
To erase a byte of EEPROM, set LATCH = 1, CPEN = 1, ER1 = 0 and ER0 = 1, write to  
the address to be erased, and set EEPGM for a time t  
.
EBYT  
To erase a block of EEPROM, set LATCH = 1, CPEN = 1, ER1 = 1 and ER0 = 0, write to  
any address in the block, and set EEPGM for a time t  
.
EBLOCK  
For a bulk erase, set LATCH = 1, CPEN = 1, ER1 = 1, and ER0 = 1, write to any address  
in the array, and set EEPGM for a time t  
.
EBULK  
To terminate the programming or erase sequence, clear EEPGM, delay for a time t  
to  
FPV  
allow the programming voltage to fall, and then clear LATCH and CPEN to free up the  
buses. Following each erase or programming sequence, clear all programming control bits.  
The following program is an example of the EEPROM programming sequence using the  
timer to implement the required delay and assuming a 2.1 MHz bus frequency.  
TSR  
EQU  
EQU  
EQU  
EQU  
EQU  
EQU  
EQU  
EQU  
EQU  
EQU  
EQU  
EQU  
EQU  
$0013  
$0018  
$0019  
$0016  
$0017  
6
$001C  
6
4
3
2
1
0
TIMER STATUS REGISTER  
TIMER COUNTER REGISTER (HIGH)  
TIMER COUNTER REGISTER (LOW)  
TIMER OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER (HIGH)  
TIMER OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER (LOW)  
OCF BIT OF TSR  
PROGRAM REGISTER  
CHARGE PUMP ENABLE  
ERASE SELECT 1  
ERASE SELECT 0  
TCNTH  
TCNTL  
TCMPH  
TCMPL  
OCF  
PROG  
CPEN  
ER1  
ER0  
LATCH  
EERC  
EEPGM  
LATCH BIT  
RC/OSC SELECTOR  
EE PROGRAM BIT  
EESTART EQU  
SUMPIN EQU  
$0240  
$FF  
STARTING ADDRESS OF EEPROM  
DUMMY DATA  
ORG  
$1800  
START  
EQU  
*
BSET  
BSR  
EERC,PROG  
DELAY  
SELECT RC OSC  
RC OSC STABILIZATION  
SECTION 3: EPROM and EEPROM  
MOTOROLA  
Page 23  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
BSET  
BSET  
BCLR  
BCLR  
LDA  
CPEN,PROG  
LATCH,PROG  
ER1,PROG  
ER0,PROG  
#SUMPIN  
TURN ON CHARGE PUMP  
ENABLE LATCH BIT  
ENSURE PROGRAM (NOT ERASE)  
ENSURE PROGRAM (NOT ERASE)  
GET DATA  
STA  
EESTART  
BSET  
JSR  
BCLR  
JSR  
BCLR  
BCLR  
LDA  
EEPGM, PROG  
DELAY  
EEPGM,PROG  
DELAY  
LATCH,PROG  
CPEN,PROG  
#SUMPIN  
ENABLE PROGRAMMING POWER  
WAIT FOR PROGRAM TIME  
CLEAR EEPGM  
WAIT FOR PROG VOLTAGE TO FALL  
CLEAR LATCH  
DISABLE CHARGE PUMP  
CMP  
EESTART  
VERIFY  
BNE  
OUT1  
CLC  
RTS  
SEC  
CLEAR CARRY BIT FOR NO ERROR  
FLAG AN ERROR  
OUT  
OUT1  
RTS  
* THIS ROUTINE GIVES ABOUT A 10 MS DELAY FOR A 2.1Mhz BUS.  
* THE SAME DELAY ROUTINE IS USED IN THIS EXAMPLE FOR SIMPLICITY,  
* USING THE LONGEST DELAY TIME. USERS WILL WANT TO WRITE SHORTER  
* DELAY ROUTINES FOR APPLICATIONS IN WHICH SPEED IS IMPORTANT.  
DELAY  
EQU  
LDA  
ADD  
STA  
LDA  
STA  
BRCLR  
RTS  
*
TCNTH  
#$15  
TCMPH  
TCNTL  
TCMPL  
OCF,TSR,*  
READ MS BYTE OF TIMER COUNTER  
ADD OFFSET  
STORE BACK IN O/P COMPARE MS BYTE  
READ LS BYTE OF TCR  
STORE INTO O/P COMPARE LS BYTE  
WAIT FOR OCF FLAG TO OCCUR  
3.2  
OPERATION IN STOP AND WAIT  
The RC oscillator for the EEPROM is automatically disabled when entering STOP mode.  
The user may want to ensure that the RC oscillator is disabled before entering WAIT mode  
to help conserve power.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 24  
SECTION 3: EPROM and EEPROM  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 4  
CPU CORE  
The MC68HC05V7 has a 16K memory map. Therefore it uses only the lower 14 bits of the  
address bus. In the following discussion the upper 2 bits of the address bus can be ignored.  
Also, the STOP instruction may be selected to act as either the normal STOP instruction or  
pull a reset by means of a mask option. All other instructions and registers behave as  
described in this chapter.  
4.1  
REGISTERS  
The MCU contains five registers that are hard-wired within the CPU and are not part of the  
memory map. These five registers are shown in Figure 4-1 and are described in the  
following paragraphs.  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ACCUMULATOR  
INDEX REGISTER  
A
X
15  
0
14  
0
13  
0
12  
0
11  
0
10  
0
9
0
8
0
1
1
STACK POINTER  
SP  
PC  
CC  
0
0
PROGRAM COUNTER  
CONDITION CODE REGISTER  
1
1
1
H
I
N
Z
C
HALF-CARRY BIT (FROM BIT 3)  
INTERRUPT MASK  
NEGATIVE BIT  
ZERO BIT  
CARRY BIT  
Figure 4-1: MC68HC05 Programming Model  
ACCUMULATOR (A)  
4.1.1  
The accumulator is a general purpose 8-bit register, as shown in Figure 4-1. The CPU uses  
the accumulator to hold operands and results of arithmetic calculations or nonarithmetic  
operations. The accumulator is unaffected by a reset of the device.  
4.1.2  
INDEX REGISTER (X)  
The index register shown in Figure 4-1 is an 8-bit register that can perform two functions:  
• Indexed addressing  
• Temporary storage  
SECTION 4: CPU CORE  
MOTOROLA  
Page 25  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
In indexed addressing with no offset, the index register contains the low byte of the operand  
address, and the high byte is assumed to be $00. In indexed addressing with an 8-bit offset,  
the CPU finds the operand address by adding the index register contents to an 8-bit  
immediate value. In indexed addressing with a 16-bit offset, the CPU finds the operand  
address by adding the index register contents to a 16-bit immediate value  
The index register can also serve as an auxiliary accumulator for temporary storage. The  
index register is unaffected by a reset of the device.  
4.1.3  
STACK POINTER (SP)  
The stack pointer shown in Figure 4-1 is a 16-bit register internally. In devices with memory  
maps less than 64 Kbytes the unimplemented upper address lines are ignored. The stack  
pointer contains the address of the next free location on the stack. During a reset or the  
reset stack pointer (RSP) instruction, the stack pointer is set to $00FF. The stack pointer is  
then decremented as data is pushed onto the stack and incremented as data is pulled from  
the stack.  
When accessing memory, the ten most significant bits are permanently set to 0000000011.  
The six least significant register bits are appended to these ten fixed bits to produce an  
address within the range of $00FF to $00C0. Subroutines and interrupts may use up to 64  
($40) locations. If 64 locations are exceeded, the stack pointer wraps around and writes  
over the previously stored information. A subroutine call occupies two locations on the  
stack and an interrupt uses five locations.  
4.1.4  
PROGRAM COUNTER (PC)  
The program counter shown in Figure 4-1 is a 16-bit register internally. In devices with  
memory maps less than 64 Kbytes the unimplemented upper address lines are ignored.  
The program counter contains the address of the next instruction or operand to be fetched.  
Normally, the address in the program counter increments to the next sequential memory  
location every time an instruction or operand is fetched. Jump, branch, and interrupt  
operations load the program counter with an address other than that of the next sequential  
location.  
4.1.5  
CONDITION CODE REGISTER (CCR)  
The CCR shown in Figure 4-1 is a 5-bit register in which four bits are used to indicate the  
results of the instruction just executed. The fifth bit is the interrupt mask. These bits can be  
individually tested by a program, and specific actions can be taken as a result of their state.  
The condition code register should be thought of as having three additional upper bits that  
are always ones. Only the interrupt mask is affected by a reset of the device. The following  
paragraphs explain the functions of the lower five bits of the condition code register.  
4.1.5.1  
Half Carry Bit (H-Bit)  
When the half-carry bit is set, it means that a carry occurred between bits 3 and 4 of the  
accumulator during the last ADD or ADC (add with carry) operation. The half-carry bit is  
required for binary-coded decimal (BCD) arithmetic operations.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 26  
SECTION 4: CPU CORE  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
4.1.5.2  
Interrupt Mask (I-Bit)  
When the interrupt mask is set, the internal and external interrupts are disabled. Interrupts  
are enabled when the interrupt mask is cleared. When an interrupt occurs, the interrupt  
mask is automatically set after the CPU registers are saved on the stack, but before the  
interrupt vector is fetched. If an interrupt request occurs while the interrupt mask is set, the  
interrupt request is latched. Normally, the interrupt is processed as soon as the interrupt  
mask is cleared.  
A return from interrupt (RTI) instruction pulls the CPU registers from the stack, restoring the  
interrupt mask to its state before the interrupt was encountered. After any reset, the  
interrupt mask is set and can only be cleared by the Clear I-Bit (CLI), STOP, or WAIT  
instructions.  
4.1.5.3  
Negative Bit (N-Bit)  
The negative bit is set when the result of the last arithmetic operation, logical operation, or  
data manipulation was negative. (Bit 7 of the result was a logical one.)  
The negative bit can also be used to check an often-tested flag by assigning the flag to bit  
7 of a register or memory location. Loading the accumulator with the contents of that  
register or location then sets or clears the negative bit according to the state of the flag.  
4.1.5.4  
Zero Bit (Z-Bit)  
The zero bit is set when the result of the last arithmetic operation, logical operation, data  
manipulation, or data load operation was zero.  
4.1.5.5  
Carry/Borrow Bit (C-Bit)  
The carry/borrow bit is set when a carry out of bit 7 of the accumulator occurred during the  
last arithmetic operation, logical operation, or data manipulation. The carry/borrow bit is  
also set or cleared during bit test and branch instructions and during shifts and rotates. This  
bit is not set by an INC or DEC instruction.  
SECTION 4: CPU CORE  
MOTOROLA  
Page 27  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
MOTOROLA  
Page 28  
SECTION 4: CPU CORE  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 5  
INTERRUPTS  
The MCU can be interrupted seven different ways:  
1. Nonmaskable Software Interrupt Instruction (SWI)  
2. External Asynchronous Interrupt (IRQ)  
3. External Interrupt via IRQ on PA0-PA7, PC0-PC7  
4. Internal 16-bit Timer Interrupt (TIMER)  
5. Internal Serial Peripheral Interface Interrupt (SPI)  
6. Internal MDLC Interrupt (MDLC)  
7. Internal 8-bit Timer Interrupt  
5.1  
CPU INTERRUPT PROCESSING  
Interrupts cause the processor to save register contents on the stack and to set the interrupt  
mask (I-bit) to prevent additional interrupts. Unlike RESET, hardware interrupts do not  
cause the current instruction execution to be halted, but are considered pending until the  
current instruction is complete.  
If interrupts are not masked (I-bit in the CCR is clear) and the corresponding interrupt  
enable bit is set the processor will proceed with interrupt processing. Otherwise, the next  
instruction is fetched and executed. If an interrupt occurs the processor completes the  
current instruction, then stacks the current CPU register states, sets the I-bit to inhibit  
further interrupts, and finally checks the pending hardware interrupts. If more than one  
interrupt is pending following the stacking operation, the interrupt with the highest vector  
location shown in Table 5-1 will be serviced first. The SWI is executed the same as any  
other instruction, regardless of the I-bit state.  
When an interrupt is to be processed the CPU fetches the address of the appropriate  
interrupt software service routine from the vector table at locations $3FF2 thru $3FFF as  
defined in Table 5-1.  
Table 5-1: Vector Address for Interrupts and Reset  
CPU  
Interrupt  
Flag  
Name  
Register  
Interrupts  
Vector Address  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Reset  
Software  
External Interrupts **  
16-bit Timer Interrupts  
MDLC Interrupt  
RESET  
SWI  
IRQ  
TIMER  
MDLC  
SPI  
$3FFE-$3FFF  
$3FFC-$3FFD  
$3FFA-$3FFB  
$3FF8-$3FF9  
$3FF6-$3FF7  
$3FF4-$3FF5  
$3FF2-$3FF3  
TSR  
OCF,ICF,TOF  
TXMS,RXMS  
SPIF  
MSR  
SPSR  
CTCSR  
SPI Interrupt  
8 bit Timer Interrupts  
TOFE,RTIE  
TIMER,RTI  
** External interrupts include IRQ, PORTA and PORTC sources  
SECTION 5: INTERRUPTS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 29  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
The M68HC05 CPU does not support interruptible instructions, therefore, the maximum  
latency to the first instruction of the interrupt service routine must include the longest  
instruction execution time plus stacking overhead.  
Latency = (Longest instruction execution time + 10) x t  
secs  
CYC  
An RTI instruction is used to signify when the interrupt software service routine is  
completed. The RTI instruction causes the register contents to be recovered from the stack  
and normal processing to resume at the next instruction that was to be executed when the  
interrupt took place. Figure 5-1 shows the sequence of events that occur during interrupt  
processing.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 30  
SECTION 5: INTERRUPTS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
FROM  
RESET  
I-BIT  
IN CCR  
SET?  
Y
N
IRQ  
EXTERNAL  
INTERRUPT  
Y
CLEAR IRQ  
REQUEST  
LATCH  
N
Y
Y
INTERNAL  
16 BIT TIMER  
INTERRUPT  
N
INTERNAL  
MDLC  
INTERRUPT  
N
Y
Y
INTERNAL  
SPI  
INTERRUPT  
N
INTERNAL  
8 BIT TIMER  
INTERRUPT  
STACK  
PC, X, A, CCR  
N
FETCH NEXT  
INSTRUCTION  
SET I BIT IN  
CC REGISTER  
LOAD PC FROM  
APPROPRIATE  
VECTOR  
Y
SWI  
INSTRUCTION  
?
N
Y
RTI  
INSTRUCTION  
?
N
RESTORE REGISTERS  
FROM STACK:  
EXECUTE  
INSTRUCTION  
CCR, A, X, PC  
Figure 5-1: Interrupt Processing Flowchart  
SECTION 5: INTERRUPTS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 31  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
5.2  
RESET INTERRUPT SEQUENCE  
The RESET function is not in the strictest sense an interrupt; however, it is acted upon in a  
similar manner, as shown in Figure 5-1. A low level input on the RESET pin or internally  
generated RST signal causes the program to vector to its starting address which is  
specified by the contents of memory locations $3FFE and $3FFF. The I-bit in the condition  
code register is also set. The MCU is configured to a known state during this type of reset  
as described in SECTION 6 RESETS.  
5.3  
SOFTWARE INTERRUPT (SWI)  
The SWI is an executable instruction and a non-maskable interrupt since it is executed  
regardless of the state of the I-bit in the CCR. If the I-bit is zero (interrupts enabled), the  
SWI instruction executes after interrupts that were pending before the SWI was fetched, or  
before interrupts generated after the SWI was fetched. The interrupt service routine  
address is specified by the contents of memory locations $3FFC and $3FFD.  
5.4  
HARDWARE INTERRUPTS  
All hardware interrupts except RESET are maskable by the I-bit in the CCR. If the I-bit is  
set, all hardware interrupts (internal and external) are disabled. Clearing the I-bit enables  
the hardware interrupts. There are two types of hardware interrupts which are explained in  
the following sections.  
5.5  
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT (IRQ)  
The IRQ pin provides an asynchronous interrupt to the CPU. A block diagram of the IRQ  
function is shown in Figure 5-2.  
NOTE: The BIH and BIL instructions will only apply to the level on the IRQ pin  
itself, and not to the output of the logic OR function with the Port A and  
Port C IRQ interrupts. The state of the individual Port A and Port C pins  
can be checked by reading the appropriate Port A and Port C pins as  
inputs.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 32  
SECTION 5: INTERRUPTS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
to BIH & BIL  
instruction  
sensing  
IRQ Pin  
V
D
IRQ  
LATCH  
IRQF  
IRQ Vector Fetch  
R
RST  
IRQA  
LEVEL  
(MASK option)  
IRQE  
PA0  
V
D
DDRA0  
DDRA7  
IRQPAF  
IRQPA  
LATCH  
R
PA7  
to IRQ  
processing  
in CPU  
IRQPAE  
PC0  
V
D
DDRC0  
IRQPCF  
IRQPC  
LATCH  
DDRC7  
PC7  
R
IRQPCE  
Figure 5-2: IRQ Function Block Diagram  
The IRQ pin is one source of an external interrupt. All Port A pins (PA0 thru PA7) and/or all  
Port C pins (PC0 thru PC7) act as other external interrupt sources. These sources each  
have their own interrupt latch but are all combined into a single external interrupt request.  
The Port A and Port C interrupt sources are negative (falling) edge sensitive only. Note  
that all Port A pins and all Port C pins are ANDed together, if configured as an input, to form  
the negative edge signal which sets the corresponding flag bits. A high to low transition on  
any Port A or Port C pin configured as an input will therefore set the respective flag bit. If a  
Port A or Port C pin is an input and is not used as a switch input in the system, it must  
remain high to prevent spurious interrupts from occurring. Refer to 9.1.3 PORT A/C I/O PIN  
INTERRUPTS for more detail on Port A/Port C interrupts.The IRQ pin interrupt source may  
be selected to be either edge sensitive or edge and level sensitive through a mask option  
or an MOR bit. If the EDGE sensitive interrupt option is selected for the IRQ pin, only the  
SECTION 5: INTERRUPTS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 33  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
IRQ latch output can activate an IRQF flag which creates an interrupt request to the CPU  
to generate the external interrupt sequence.  
When edge sensitivity is selected for the IRQ interrupt, it is sensitive to the following cases:  
• Falling edge on the IRQ pin.  
• Falling edge on any Port A or Port C pin with IRQ enabled.  
If the LEVEL option selected, the active low state of the IRQ pin can also activate an IRQF  
flag, which creates an IRQ request to the CPU to generate the IRQ interrupt sequence.  
When edge and level sensitivity is selected for the IRQ interrupt, it is sensitive to the  
following cases:  
• Low level on the IRQ pin.  
• Falling edge on the IRQ pin.  
• Falling edge on any Port A or Port C pin with IRQ enabled.  
The IRQE enable bit controls whether an active IRQF flag (IRQ pin interrupt) can generate  
an IRQ interrupt sequence. The IRQPAE enable bit controls whether an active IRQPAF flag  
(Port A interrupt) can generate an IRQ interrupt sequence. The IRQPCE enable bit controls  
whether an active IRQPCF flag (Port C interrupt) can generate an IRQ interrupt sequence.  
The IRQ interrupt is serviced by the interrupt service routine located at the address  
specified by the contents of $3FFA and $3FFB.  
The IRQF latch is automatically cleared by entering the interrupt service routine to maintain  
compatibility with existing M6805 interrupt servicing protocol. To allow the user to identify  
the source of the interrupt, the port interrupt flags (IRQPAF and IRQPCF) are not cleared  
automatically. These flags must be cleared within the interrupt handler prior to exit in order  
to prevent repeated re-entry. This is achieved by writing a logic one to the IRQA (IRQ  
acknowledge) bit, which will clear all pending IRQ interrupts (including a pending IRQ pin  
interrupt).  
The interrupt request flags (IRQPAF and IRQPCF) are read only and cannot be cleared by  
writing to them. The acknowledge flag always reads as a logic 0. Together, these features  
permit the safe use of read-modify-write instructions (for example, BSET, BCLR) on the  
ICSR.  
NOTE: Although read modify write instruction use is allowable on the ICSR, shift  
operations should be avoided due to the possibility of inadvertently setting  
the IRQA.  
5.5.1  
IRQ CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (ICSR) $1F  
The IRQ interrupt function is controlled by the ICSR located at $001F. All unused bits in the  
ICSR will read as logic zeros. The IRQF bit is cleared and IRQE bit is set by reset.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 34  
SECTION 5: INTERRUPTS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
.
7
IRQE  
1
6
IRQPAE  
0
5
IRQPCE  
0
4
0
3
2
1
0
0
R
IRQF  
IRQPAF  
IRQPCF  
ICSR  
$001F  
W
IRQA  
reset  
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 5-3: IRQ Status & Control Register  
IRQA - IRQ Interrupt Acknowledge  
5.5.1.1  
The IRQA acknowledge bit clears an IRQ interrupt by clearing the IRQ, IRQPA and IRQPC  
latches. This is achieved by writing a logic one to the IRQA acknowledge bit. Writing a logic  
zero to the IRQA acknowledge bit will have no effect on the any of the IRQ latches. If either  
the IRQ, IRQPA or IRQPC latch is not cleared within the IRQ service routine the CPU will  
re-enter the IRQ interrupt sequence continuously until the IRQ latches are all cleared. The  
IRQA is useful for cancelling unwanted or spurious interrupts which may have occurred  
while servicing the initial IRQ interrupt. The IRQA acknowledge bit will always read as a  
logic zero. The IRQA function is activated by reset.  
NOTE: The IRQ latch is cleared automatically during the IRQ vector fetch. The  
IRQPA and IRQPC latches are not cleared automatically (to permit  
interrupt source differentiation) and must be cleared from within the IRQ  
service routine.  
5.5.1.2  
IRQPCF - Port C IRQ Interrupt Request  
The IRQPCF flag bit indicates that a Port C IRQ request is pending. Writing to the IRQPCF  
flag bit will have no effect on it. The IRQPCF flag bit must be cleared by writing a logic one  
to the IRQA acknowledge bit. In this way an additional IRQPCF flag bit that is set while in  
the service routine can be ignored by clearing the IRQPCF flag bit before exiting the service  
routine. If the additional IRQPCF flag bit is not cleared in the IRQ service routine and the  
IRQPCE enable bit remains set, the CPU will re-enter the IRQ interrupt sequence  
continuously until either the IRQPCF flag bit or the IRQPCE enable bit is clear. This bit is  
operational regardless of the state of the IRQPCE bit. The IRQPCF bit is cleared by reset.  
5.5.1.3  
IRQPAF - Port A IRQ Interrupt Request  
The IRQPAF flag bit indicates that a Port A IRQ request is pending. Writing to the IRQPAF  
flag bit will have no effect on it. The IRQPAF flag bit must be cleared by writing a logic one  
to the IRQA acknowledge bit. In this way an additional IRQPAF flag bit that is set while in  
the service routine can be ignored by clearing the IRQPAF flag bit before exiting the service  
routine. If the additional IRQPAF flag bit is not cleared in the IRQ service routine and the  
IRQPAE enable bit remains set, the CPU will re-enter the IRQ interrupt sequence  
continuously until either the IRQPAF flag bit or the IRQPAE enable bit is clear. This bit is  
operational regardless of the state of the IRQPAE bit. The IRQPAF bit is cleared by reset.  
SECTION 5: INTERRUPTS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 35  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
5.5.1.4 IRQF - IRQ Interrupt Request  
The IRQF flag bit indicates that an IRQ request is pending. Writing to the IRQF flag bit will  
have no effect on it. The IRQF flag bit is cleared when the IRQ vector is fetched prior to the  
service routine being entered. The IRQF flag bit can also be cleared by writing a logic one  
to the IRQA acknowledge bit to clear the IRQ latch. In this way any additional IRQF flag bit  
that is set while in the service routine can be ignored by clearing the IRQF flag bit before  
exiting the service routine. If the additional IRQF flag bit is not cleared in the IRQ service  
routine and the IRQE enable bit remains set, the CPU will re-enter the IRQ interrupt  
sequence continuously until either the IRQF flag bit or the IRQE enable bit is clear. The IRQ  
latch is cleared by reset. This flag can be set only when the IRQE enable is set.  
5.5.1.5  
IRQPCE - Port C IRQ Interrupt Enable  
The IRQPCE bit controls whether the IRQPCF flag bit can or cannot initiate an IRQ interrupt  
sequence. If the IRQPCE enable bit is set the IRQPCF flag bit can generate an interrupt  
sequence. If the IRQPCE enable bit is cleared the IRQPCF flag bit cannot generate an  
interrupt sequence. Reset clears the IRQPCE enable bit, thereby disabling Port C IRQ  
interrupts. In addition, reset also sets the I-bit, which masks all interrupt sources. Execution  
of the STOP or WAIT instructions does not effect the IRQPCE bit.  
5.5.1.6  
IRQPAE - Port A IRQ Interrupt Enable  
The IRQPAE bit controls whether the IRQPAF flag bit can or cannot initiate an IRQ interrupt  
sequence. If the IRQPAE enable bit is set the IRQPAF flag bit can generate an interrupt  
sequence. If the IRQPAE enable bit is cleared the IRQPAF flag bit cannot generate an  
interrupt sequence. Reset clears the IRQPAE enable bit, thereby disabling Port A IRQ  
interrupts. In addition, reset also sets the I-bit, which masks all interrupt sources. Execution  
of the STOP or WAIT instructions does not effect the IRQPAE bit.  
NOTE: The IRQPAE and IRQPCE mask bits must be set prior to entering STOP  
or WAIT modes if Port IRQ interrupts are to be enabled.  
5.5.1.7  
IRQE - IRQ Interrupt Enable  
The IRQE bit controls whether the IRQF flag bit can or cannot initiate an IRQ interrupt  
sequence. If the IRQE enable bit is set the IRQF flag bit can generate an interrupt  
sequence. If the IRQE enable bit is cleared the IRQF flag bit cannot bet set and therefor  
cannot generate an interrupt sequence. Reset sets the IRQE enable bit, thereby enabling  
IRQ interrupts once the I-bit is cleared. Execution of the STOP or WAIT instructions causes  
the IRQE bit to be set in order to allow the external IRQ to exit these modes. In addition,  
reset also sets the I-bit, which masks all interrupt sources.  
5.5.2  
External Interrupt Timing  
If the interrupt mask bit (I bit) of the CCR is set, all maskable interrupts (internal and  
external) are disabled. Clearing the I bit enables interrupts. The interrupt request is latched  
immediately following the falling edge of the IRQ source. It is then synchronized internally  
MOTOROLA  
Page 36  
SECTION 5: INTERRUPTS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
and serviced as specified by the contents of $3FFA and $3FFB.The IRQ timing diagram is  
shown in Figure 5-4.  
IRQ  
tILIH  
tILIL  
IRQ1 (Port)  
tILIH  
.
.
.
IRQn (Port)  
IRQ  
(MCU)  
Figure 5-4: External Interrupts Timing Diagram  
Either a level-sensitive and edge-sensitive trigger, or an edge-sensitive-only trigger is  
available as a mask option for the IRQ pin only.  
5.6  
16 BIT TIMER INTERRUPT  
There are three different timer interrupt flags that cause a timer interrupt whenever they are  
set and enabled. The interrupt flags are in the Timer Status Register (TSR), and the enable  
bits are in the Timer Control Register (TCR). Any of these interrupts will vector to the same  
interrupt service routine, located at the address specified by the contents of memory  
location $3FF8 and $3FF9.  
5.7  
MDLC INTERRUPT  
The MDLC Transmit Message Successful and Receive Message Successful interrupts are  
respectively generated by the TXMS and RXMS bits of the MDLC Status Register (MSR).  
In addition a wake-up from STOP or WAIT mode can also generate an interrupt from the  
MDLC. The MDLC Interrupt Enable (IE) bit is located in the MDLC Control Register (MCR).  
Provided the IE bit is set (and the CCR I bit is clear), all interrupts will vector to the same  
interrupt service routine, located at the address specified by the contents of memory  
location $3FF6 and $3FF7.  
5.8  
SPI INTERRUPT  
There are two different SPI interrupt flags that cause an SPI interrupt whenever they are  
set and enabled. The interrupt flags are in the SPI Status Register (SPSR), and the enable  
bits are in the SPI Control Register (SPCR). Either of these interrupts will vector to the  
SECTION 5: INTERRUPTS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 37  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
same interrupt service routine, located at the address specified by the contents of memory  
locations $3FF4 and $3FF5.  
5.9  
8-BIT TIMER INTERRUPT  
This timer can create two types of interrupts. A timer overflow interrupt will occur whenever  
the 8 bit timer rolls over from $FF to $00 and the enable bit TOFE is set. A real time interrupt  
will occur whenever the programmed time elapses and the enable bit RTIE is set. See  
SECTION 12 CORE TIMER. This interrupt will vector to the interrupt service routine located  
at the address specified by the contents of memory locations $3FF2 and $3FF3.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 38  
SECTION 5: INTERRUPTS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 6  
RESETS  
The MCU can be reset from six sources: one external input and five internal restart  
conditions. The RESET pin is an input with a Schmitt trigger as shown in Figure 6-1. All the  
internal peripheral modules will be reset by the internal reset signal (RST). Refer to Figure  
6-2 for reset timing detail.  
To IRQ  
logic  
IRQ/V  
TST  
D
Mode  
Select  
LATCH  
RESET  
R
(pulse width = 3 x E-clk)  
CLOCKED  
ONE-SHOT  
PH2  
OSC  
Data  
Address  
COP Watchdog  
(COPR)  
Low-Voltage  
Reset (LVR)  
CPU  
RST  
V
V
DD  
DD  
S
D
LATCH  
To other  
peripherals  
Power-On Reset  
(POR)  
PH2  
Illegal Address  
(ILLADDR)  
Address  
Disabled STOP  
instruction  
STOPEN  
Figure 6-1: Reset Block Diagram  
6.1  
EXTERNAL RESET (RESET)  
The RESET pin is the only external source of a reset. This pin is connected to a Schmitt  
trigger input gate to provide an upper and lower threshold voltage separated by a minimum  
amount of hysteresis. This external reset occurs whenever the RESET pin is pulled below  
the lower threshold and remains in reset until the RESET pin rises above the upper  
threshold. This active low input will generate the RST signal and reset the CPU and  
peripherals. Termination of the external RESET input or the internal COP Watchdog reset  
are the only reset sources that can alter the operating mode of the MCU.  
NOTE: Activation of the RST signal is generally referred to as reset of the device,  
unless otherwise specified.  
SECTION 6: RESETS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 39  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
The RESET pin can also act as an open drain output. It will be pulled to a low state by an  
internal pulldown that is activated by any reset source. This RESET pulldown device will  
only be asserted for 3-4 cycles of the internal clock, PH2 (PH2 period = E clock period) or  
as long as an internal reset source is asserted. When the external RESET pin is asserted,  
the pulldown device will be turned on for only the 3-4 internal clock cycles.  
6.2  
INTERNAL RESETS  
The five internally generated resets are the initial power-on reset function, the COP  
Watchdog Timer reset, the illegal address detector, the low-voltage reset, and the disabled  
STOP instruction. Termination of the external RESET input or the internal COP Watchdog  
Timer are the only reset sources that can alter the operating mode of the MCU. The other  
internal resets will not have any effect on the mode of operation when their reset state ends.  
All internal resets will also assert (pull to logic zero) the external RESET pin for the duration  
of the reset or 3-4 internal clock cycles, whichever is longer.  
6.2.1  
POWER-ON RESET (POR)  
The internal POR is generated on power-up to allow the clock oscillator to stabilize. The  
POR is strictly for power turn-on conditions and is not able to detect a drop in the power  
supply voltage (brown-out). There is an oscillator stabilization delay of 4064 internal  
processor bus clock cycles (PH2) after the oscillator becomes active.  
The POR will generate the RST signal which will reset the CPU. If any other reset function  
is active at the end of this 4064 cycle delay, the RST signal will remain in the reset condition  
until the other reset condition(s) end.  
POR will activate the RESET pin pulldown device connected to the pin. V  
must drop  
DD  
below V  
in order for the internal POR circuit to detect the next rise of V .  
DD  
POR  
6.2.2  
OPERATION IN STOP AND WAIT  
If enabled, the LVR supply voltage sense option is active during STOP and WAIT. Any reset  
source can bring the MCU out of STOP or WAIT modes.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 40  
SECTION 6: RESETS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
Figure 6-2: RESET and POR Timing Diagram  
SECTION 6: RESETS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 41  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
6.2.3 COMPUTER OPERATING PROPERLY RESET (COPR)  
The MCU contains a watchdog timer that automatically times out if not reset (cleared) within  
a specific time by a program reset sequence. If the COP watchdog timer is allowed to time-  
out, an internal reset is generated to reset the MCU. Regardless of an internal or external  
RESET, the MCU comes out of a COP reset according to the standard rules of mode  
selection.  
The COP reset function is enabled or disabled by a mask option and is verified during  
production testing.  
The COP Watchdog reset will activate the internal pulldown device connected to the  
RESET pin.  
6.2.3.1  
RESETTING THE COP  
Preventing a COP reset is done by writing a “0” to the COPF bit. This action will reset the  
counter and begin the time-out period again. The COPF bit is bit 0 of address $3FF0. A  
read of address $3FF0 will return user data programmed at that location.  
6.2.3.2  
COP DURING WAIT MODE  
The COP will continue to operate normally during WAIT mode. The software should pull the  
device out of WAIT mode periodically and reset the COP by writing to the COPF bit to  
prevent a COP reset.  
6.2.3.3  
COP DURING STOP MODE  
When the STOP enable mask option is selected, STOP mode disables the oscillator circuit  
and thereby turns the clock off for the entire device. The COP counter will be reset when  
STOP mode is entered. If a reset is used to exit STOP mode, the COP counter will be held  
in reset during the 4064 cycles of start up delay. If any operable interrupt is used to exit  
STOP mode, the COP counter will not be reset during the 4064 cycle start up delay and  
will have that many cycles already counted when control is returned to the program.  
6.2.3.4  
COP WATCHDOG TIMER CONSIDERATIONS  
The COP Watchdog Timer is active in all modes of operation if enabled by a mask option.  
If the COP Watchdog Timer is selected by a mask option, any execution of the STOP  
instruction (either intentional or inadvertent due to the CPU being disturbed) will cause the  
oscillator to halt and prevent the COP Watchdog Timer from timing out. Therefore, it is  
recommended that the STOP instruction should be disabled if the COP Watchdog Timer  
is enabled.  
If the COP Watchdog Timer is selected by a mask option, the COP will reset the MCU when  
it times out. Therefore, it is recommended that the COP Watchdog should be disabled for  
a system that must have intentional uses of the WAIT Mode for periods longer than the  
COP time-out period.  
The recommended interactions and considerations for the COP Watchdog Timer, STOP  
instruction, and WAIT instruction are summarized in Table 6-1.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 42  
SECTION 6: RESETS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
Table 6-1: COP Watchdog Timer Recommendations  
IF the following conditions exist:  
STOP Instruction  
THEN the  
COP Watchdog Timer  
should be as follows:  
WAIT Time  
converted to reset  
WAIT Time Less than  
Enable or disable COP  
by mask option  
COP Time-Out  
converted to reset  
Acts as STOP  
WAIT Time More than  
Disable COP  
by mask option  
COP Time-Out  
any length  
WAIT Time  
Disable COP  
by mask option  
6.2.3.5  
COP REGISTER  
The COP register is shared with the MSB of an unimplemented User Interrupt Vector as  
shown in Figure 6-3. Reading this location will return whatever user data has been  
programmed at this location. Writing a “0” to the COPR bit in this location will clear the COP  
watchdog timer.  
READ  
WRITE  
REGISTER  
ADDR  
$3FF0  
7
x
6
x
5
x
4
x
3
x
2
x
1
x
0
R
x
UNIMPLEMENTED VECTOR &  
COP WATCHDOG TIMER  
W
COPR  
UNIMPLEMENTED  
Figure 6-3: COP Watchdog Timer Location  
LOW-VOLTAGE RESET (LVR)  
The internal low voltage (LVR) reset is generated when V falls below the LVR threshold  
6.2.4  
DD  
V
and will be released following a POR delay starting when V rises above V  
.
LVRI  
DD  
LVRR  
The LVR threshold is tested to be above the minimum operating voltage of the  
microcontroller and is intended to ensure that the CPU will be held in reset when the V  
BATT  
supply voltage is below reasonable operating limits. However, it should be noted that the  
LVR monitors V not V . A mask option is provided to disable the LVR when the  
DD  
BATT  
device is expected to normally operate at low voltages. Note that the V rise and fall slew  
DD  
rates (S  
and S  
) must be within the specification for proper LVR operation. If the  
VDDR  
VDDF  
specification is not met, the circuit will operate properly following a delay of V /Slew rate.  
DD  
The LVR will generate the RST signal that will reset the CPU and other peripherals. As it is  
not possible to determine the level of the internal V at the point V  
recovers (and POR  
DD  
BATT  
is not intended to detect a loss of V ), an LVR will always recover using a POR delay. The  
DD  
low voltage reset will activate the internal pulldown device connected to the RESET pin.  
SECTION 6: RESETS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 43  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
If any other reset function is active at the end of the LVR reset signal, the RST signal will  
remain in the reset condition until the other reset condition(s) end.  
6.2.5  
ILLEGAL ADDRESS  
An illegal address reset is generated when the CPU attempts to fetch an instruction from  
either unimplemented address space ($01C0 to $023F and $02C0 to $17FF) or I/O  
address space ($0000 to $003F).  
The illegal address reset will activate the internal pulldown device connected to the RESET  
pin.  
6.2.6  
DISABLED STOP INSTRUCTION  
When the mask option is selected to disable the STOP instruction, execution of a STOP  
instruction results in an internal reset. This activates the internal pulldown device  
connected to the RESET pin.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 44  
SECTION 6: RESETS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 7  
POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION  
The MC68HC05V7 contains a low-power CMOS on-chip fixed voltage regulator to provide  
internal power to the MCU from an external DC source. The MCU features separate analog  
and digital power and ground pins to help decrease common-mode noise contamination of  
the analog subsystems. The supply pins are also grouped in adjacent pairs to permit  
optimal decoupling and to minimize radiated RF emissions.  
7.1  
INTERNAL POWER SUPPLY  
The on-chip voltage regulation and power supply control circuitry is comprised of four  
elements: the primary regulator, the secondary regulator, the power mode control, and the  
LVR circuitry. The primary internal regulator can be disabled through register control bits.  
When it is desired to use an external voltage regulator, regulated power must be provided  
to both sets of V /VSS pins. When the primary regulator is disabled, the regulator input  
DD  
pin (V  
) is still used to power the MDLC’s physical interface.  
BATT  
7.1.1  
PRIMARY 5V REGULATOR  
The primary 5V regulator accepts a regulated input supply and provides a regulated 5V  
supply to all the digital sections of the device with the exception of the V and power  
IGN  
supply control logic. The output of this regulator is also connected to the V  
pins to allow  
DD  
for decoupling of the digital supply pins (V ), to supply a decoupled and/or filtered supply  
DD  
to the analog supply pin (V  
) and to provide an external power source for off chip usage.  
CCA  
The regulator requires an external 10 uF capacitor for stability.  
See Figure 7-6 : MC68HC05V7 On-chip Power Supply Configuration for the most  
suitable supply pin and external capacitor connections.  
The primary regulator can be disabled through software by clearing the PDC bit of the  
MISCELLANEOUS register (see Figure 7-1). Once disabled, the regulator can only be  
enabled by a rising edge on the V  
or BUS (if mask option enabled) pins. When disabled,  
IGN  
the primary regulator output will be connected to V if the V  
mask option has been  
SS  
DDC  
selected. This prevents unintentional device operation using current sourced through  
external pullup components.  
Any loss of V  
sufficient to trigger an LVR will cause the device to be reset. The device  
BATT  
will remain in the reset state for the duration of the LVR condition or until the internal V  
DD  
drops below the functional level of the device, at which point reset no longer has meaning.  
If the drop in V that triggers an LVR is transient, the internal RST will be asserted for  
BATT  
a minimum 4064 cycles of the CPU bus clock, PH2 (the POR delay).  
7.1.2 SECONDARY REGULATOR  
The secondary regulator provides an independent supply to the small amount of power  
supply control logic required to provide some of the power moding functions. The  
SECTION 7: POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION  
MOTOROLA  
Page 45  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
secondary regulator is always enabled (regardless of the mask option selection) but  
consumes significantly less power than the primary regulator. The secondary regulator will  
provide sufficient voltage to the control logic provided V  
remains above the minimum  
BATT  
voltage.  
7.2  
MISCELLANEOUS REGISTER  
The software power supply management functions are performed through the  
MISCELLANEOUS register located at $002F. Although the OCE bit of the  
MISCELLANEOUS register is unrelated to the power supply, it will be described here.  
READ  
WRITE  
REGISTER  
ADDR  
$002F  
7
6
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
IGNS  
R
MISCELLANEOUS REGISTER  
OCE  
PDC  
W
reset  
-
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
UNIMPLEMENTED  
Figure 7-1: Miscellaneous Register  
IGNS - Ignition status bit  
This is a read only status bit which indicates the state of the V  
7.2.1  
pin.  
IGN  
0 - The V  
1 - The V  
pin is less than the V level for this pin.  
IL  
IGN  
IGN  
pin is greater than the V level for this pin.  
IH  
WARNING: There is not hysteresis or hardware debounce on the V  
pin and hence, in  
IGN  
the state of this bit. This bit cannot be read unless the Regulator option is enabled.  
See 17.3 DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS for V and V levels.  
IH  
IL  
7.2.2  
OCE - Output compare enable  
This bit controls the function of the PB6 pin.  
0 - PB6 functions as a normal I/O pin.  
1 - PB6 becomes the TCMP output pin for the 16-bit timer.  
See SECTION 11 16-BIT TIMER for a description of the TCMP function.  
Reset clears this bit.  
7.2.3  
PDC - Power Down Control  
This bit controls the internal primary voltage regulator.  
0 - Disables the internal primary voltage regulator.  
1 - Enables the internal primary voltage regulator.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 46  
SECTION 7: POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
This bit has no affect unless the regulator option is set. This bit is not affected by reset and  
must be initialized by software.  
7.3  
POWER MODING  
A flow diagram depicting all conditions that the MCU could enter is shown in Figure 7-2.  
The chip can be operated in one of three distinct power modes. The first mode is "Power  
off". In this mode, the chip is not being powered from any source. The V  
pin voltage is  
BATT  
below that required by the regulator circuit to provide an output voltage that is within  
regulation limits.  
The second mode is "Standby power". In this mode, the V  
voltage is above the  
BATT  
required minimum, but the user has not turned the primary regulator on. The secondary  
regulator and the power mode logic are powered up. Standby mode can be exited by either  
reducing the V  
voltage or by turning the primary regulator on.  
BATT  
The third mode is "Power up" mode. In this mode, the CPU and peripherals can perform  
their normal processing tasks. The only way to exit from this mode is to lose regulator  
output power. Losing regulator output power can happen in one of three ways: 1) the V  
BATT  
voltage can fall below the required minimum level causing V to fall below minimum, 2)  
DD  
software can turn the primary regulator off, and 3) some sort of fault on the external V  
DD  
pin. In any case, the LVR reset will be asserted to protect the system as the V voltage is  
DD  
falling.  
Transitioning between these states is referred to as power moding.  
SECTION 7: POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION  
MOTOROLA  
Page 47  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
Power Off  
Mode  
no  
V
>min  
yes  
BATT  
Standby Power  
Mode  
no  
V
IGN  
or  
BUS  
yes  
Primary Reg.  
Enabled  
POR Delay  
Power up  
Mode  
LVR  
(chip reset)  
Steady State  
Condition  
no  
V >min  
DD  
yes  
Decision  
yes  
Primary Reg.  
Disabled  
no  
pdc=0  
Transition  
Figure 7-2: MC68HC05V7 Power Moding Flow Diagram  
MOTOROLA  
Page 48  
SECTION 7: POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
7.4  
REGULATOR CONTROL LOGIC  
The ignition state monitor pin, V , or the MDLC BUS pin (provided the MDLCPU mask  
IGN  
option is selected) allows the user to wake-up the primary power supply and subsequently  
the MCU. A positive transition applied to either pin will enable the primary regulator. The  
state of the V  
pin can be determined by reading the IGNS bit of the MISCELLANEOUS  
IGN  
register. The primary regulator can be disabled by clearing the PDC bit in the  
MISCELLANEOUS register. The BUS or V pin need not be low to write the PDC bit.  
IGN  
Once the regulator has been disabled, a rising edge on V  
regulator.  
or BUS will re-enable the  
IGN  
To ensure the validity of the PDC bit during a V transition, the PDC bit is always copied  
DD  
into a latch powered by the secondary regulator. The bit is copied during a write to the  
MISCELLANEOUS register. When the regulator is powered up by a rising edge of BUS or  
V
, the latch that contains the copy of the PDC bit will be initialized to a 1 and may have  
IGN  
a different value than the PDC bit itself. Software should always initialize the PDC bit to a  
1. The latch will be set on the rising edge of V or BUS. This will give the primary  
IGN  
regulator, CPU, and software ample time to start up and initialize the PDC bit to a 1. At this  
point, the MCU will transition to the Power Up Mode. (See Figure 7-2.)  
In order to ensure that the primary regulator starts up when V  
voltage is applied to the  
BATT  
MCU, a low to high transition should be provided on the V  
minimum level, shown in Figure 7-3.  
pin once V  
reaches  
IGN  
BATT  
Voltage  
V
>min  
BATT  
V
BATT  
Min  
BATT  
V
IGN  
V
V
<= 0.4*V  
IGN  
BATT  
time  
Figure 7-3: Regulator Startup  
NOTE: Once enabled, the regulator can only be disabled through software.  
SECTION 7: POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION  
MOTOROLA  
Page 49  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
NOTE: If the LVR option is enabled, reset will be asserted when V drops to the  
DD  
appropriate level.  
NOTE: Before the PDC bit is written to a 0, the state of the IGNS bit should be  
debounced in software. This will ensure that the primary regulator does  
not power up with any bounce that may be present on Vign.  
7.4.1  
MASK OPTIONS  
The regulator has three mask options associated with it. The first one is the MDLCPU  
option. If this option is enabled, a rising edge on the MDLC BUS pin or the V pin can  
IGN  
bring the primary regulator out of the Standby power mode. If this option is not enabled,  
only the V pin will bring the primary regulator out of the Standby power mode.  
IGN  
The second mask option is the V  
option. This option, if enabled, will enable an active  
DDC  
pulldown device, connected between V and V , to turn on when the primary regulator  
DD  
SS  
is disabled. This option should not be selected if an external voltage regulator is being used.  
The third mask option is the regulator enable option. If it is not desired to use the on-board  
voltage regulator, this option should not be selected. In this case the secondary regulator  
will still remain active in order to properly keep the primary regulator turned off. While the  
regulator is not enabled the MDLCPU option will remain operational but will serve no  
purpose. The V  
option and the MISCELLANEOUS register will continue to operate  
DDC  
normally. The V  
function (V to V clamping device) uses the PDC bit to determine  
DD SS  
DDC  
when to turn the clamping device on. If this option is enabled and the PDC bit is written to  
a "0", the clamping device will turn on. It will not turn off until a rising edge is detected on  
V
or a rising edge on the BUS pin is detected provided the MDLCPU option is selected.  
IGN  
If the configuration shown in Figure 7-4 is used with the regulator enable option selected,  
the MDLCPU and V options may be selected. In addition, software must write a ’1’ to  
DDC  
the PDC bit in the miscellaneous register to initialize it after power-up. This prevents read-  
modify-write instructions to the MISCELLANEOUS register from accidentally clearing the  
PDC bit.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 50  
SECTION 7: POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
V
BATT  
705V8  
V
BATT  
External  
+5 Volts  
V
Regulator  
DD  
0.1µ  
MCU  
V
V
DD  
0.1µ  
0.1µ  
CCA  
V
IGN  
V ,V  
SS SS  
V
V
SSA1  
SSA2  
Figure 7-4: Using the 68HC05V7 with an External Regulator  
If the regulator enable option is not selected, the MDLCPU option and the PDC bit have no  
affect. The V  
option will remain available.  
DDC  
Figure 7-5 is a block diagram of the regulator control circuit. It illustrates how the  
MISCELLANEOUS register bits, V , BUS and the Mask options interact in the power  
IGN  
moding scheme.  
SECTION 7: POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION  
MOTOROLA  
Page 51  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
V
V
BATT  
Secondary  
Regulator  
(VEE)  
Primary  
Regulator  
MDLC PU  
Mask Option  
DDC  
Mask Option  
enable  
V
DD  
V
EE  
latch  
D Q  
latch  
D Q  
S
R
Q
BUS  
V
EE  
V
Q
BATT  
latch  
D
C
V
IGN  
Q
R
latch  
D
Q
s
IGNS  
...  
Misc. Reg.  
PDC  
Figure 7-5: Power Moding Block Diagram  
MOTOROLA  
Page 52  
SECTION 7: POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
7.5  
POWER SUPPLY CONFIGURATION  
The recommended decoupling and interconnection of the various power supply pins is shown in  
Figure 7-6. Note that this diagram does not reflect actual pin location or order.  
V
BATT  
V
Supply  
IGN  
V
V
IGN  
IGN  
Internal (digital)  
and V  
Logic  
R*  
C*  
Ignition  
V
DD  
CC  
Secondary  
Regulator  
ENABLE  
Primary  
5v regulator  
>= Min V  
V
BATT  
BATT  
V
V
DD  
DD  
10 uF  
0.1uF  
0.1uF  
Required for  
Regulator  
stability  
V
V
SS  
SS  
V
0.1uF  
SSA1  
A/D Converter  
MDLC Analog  
EPROM  
V
CCA  
0.1uF  
Single Point  
Ground  
V
SSA2  
* RC values should be chosen to provide a V  
voltage of <= 0.4*V  
once V  
IGN  
BATT BATT  
reaches minimum level.  
Note: The 10 uF capacitor should be placed on the V pin closest to the V  
pin.  
DD  
IGN  
Figure 7-6: MC68HC05V7 On-chip Power Supply Configuration  
7.5.1  
DECOUPLING RECOMMENDATIONS  
To provide effective decoupling and to reduce radiated RF emissions, the small decoupling  
capacitors must be located as close to the supply pins as possible. The self-inductance of these  
capacitors and the parasitic inductance and capacitance of the interconnecting traces  
determines the self-resonant frequency of the decoupling network. Too low a frequency will  
reduce decoupling effectiveness and could increase radiated RF emissions from the system. A  
low value capacitor (470 pF to 0.01 uF) placed in parallel with the other capacitors will improve  
the bandwidth and effectiveness of the network.  
SECTION 7: POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION  
MOTOROLA  
Page 53  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
PC7  
PC6  
PC5  
PC4  
PC3  
PC2  
PC1  
PC0  
PE7/AN  
PE6/AN  
PE5/AN  
PE4/AN  
PD7/AN  
PD6/AN  
PD5/AN  
PD4/AN  
PD3/AN  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
PF3/MISO  
PF2/MOSI  
PF1/SCLK  
PF0/SS  
PB0  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
Digital Logic  
Blocks  
PB1  
PB2  
PB3  
PB4  
PB5  
PB6/TCMP  
PB7/TCAP  
DLC  
V
SSA2  
A/D  
Regulator  
LOAD  
BUS  
R
V
PP  
N.C.  
R ~ 40 ohns  
68-pin PLCC package shown  
Figure 7-7: HC705V8 Internal Power Routing  
1) V to V  
(pins 30 & 31): On-chip regulator output decoupling. As with any reg-  
DD  
SSD  
ulator, the output must be adequately decoupled to maintain stability of the regulator.  
Decouple with at least 10 uF tantalum or aluminum electrolytic bulk in parallel with 0.1uF  
ceramic or polystyrene capacitor for high frequency (HF) stability. Locate both capacitors  
as close as possible to the V and V  
pins, ensuring the HF capacitor is closest. The  
DD  
SSD  
two V  
pins should be externally connected together.  
SSD  
MOTOROLA  
Page 54  
SECTION 7: POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
The effect of not connecting the two V  
pins together is under evaluation and it is recom-  
DD  
mended that they be connected at this time.  
2) V to V (pins 3 & 4): MCU internal digital power decoupling. These pins are  
DD  
SSD  
connected to the on-chip regulator output via a small resistance. Decouple with a 0.1uF  
ceramic or polystyrene capacitator. If the self-resonance frequency of the decoupling cir-  
cuit (assume 4nH per bond wire) is too low, add a 0.01uF or smaller capacitor in parallel to  
increase the bandwidth of the decoupling network. Ensure the smaller capacitor is located  
closest to the V and V  
pins.  
DD  
SSD  
3) V  
to V  
and V  
: Analog subsystem power supply pins. These pins are  
CCA  
SSA1  
SSA2  
internally isolated from the digital V and V supplies. The V pin provides a ground  
SSA1  
DD  
SS  
return for the A/D subsystem. The V  
pin provides a ground return for the DLC sub-  
SSA2  
system. The analog supply pins should be appropriately filtered to prevent any external  
noise effecting the analog subsystems. The V and V pins should be brought  
SSA1  
SSA2  
together with the digital ground at a single point which has a low (HF) impedance to  
ground to prevent common mode noise problems. If this is not practical, then the V  
SSA1  
and V  
printed circuit board (PCB) traces should be routed in such a manner that digi-  
SSA2  
tal ground return current is impeded from passing through the analog input ground refer-  
ence as shown in the single sided PCB example below.  
Poor Analog Grounding  
V7  
ANx  
Shielded cable,  
Twisted pair, etc.  
V
SSA VSSD  
AIN  
V7  
GND  
ANx  
VSSA  
VSSD  
Shielded cable, Twisted pair, etc.  
AIN  
AGND  
Better Analog Grounding  
GND  
To System GND  
SECTION 7: POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION  
MOTOROLA  
Page 55  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
MOTOROLA  
Page 56  
SECTION 7: POWER SUPPLY AND REGULATION  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 8  
LOW-POWER MODES  
The MC68HC05V7 is capable of running in one of several low-power operational modes.  
The WAIT and STOP instructions provide two modes that reduce the power required for  
the MCU by stopping various internal clocks and/or the on-chip oscillator. The STOP and  
WAIT instructions are not normally used if the COP Watchdog Timer is enabled. A mask  
option is provided to convert the STOP instruction to an internal reset. The flow of the STOP  
and WAIT modes is shown in Figure 8-2.  
8.1  
STOP INSTRUCTION  
The STOP instruction can result in one of two operations depending on the Mask Options.  
If the STOP option is enabled, the STOP instruction operates like the STOP in normal  
MC68HC05 family members and places the device in the low power STOP Mode. If the  
STOP option is disabled, the STOP instruction will cause a chip reset when executed.  
8.1.1  
STOP MODE  
Execution of the STOP instruction, with the proper mask option, places the MCU in its  
lowest power consumption mode. In the STOP Mode the internal oscillator is turned off,  
halting all internal processing, including the COP Watchdog Timer.  
During the STOP mode, the TCR bits are altered to remove any pending timer interrupt  
request and to disable any further timer interrupts. The timer prescaler is cleared. The I bit  
in the CCR is cleared and the IRQE mask is set in the ICSR to enable external interrupts.  
All other registers and memory remain unaltered. All input/output lines remain unchanged.  
The processor can be brought out of the STOP mode only by an external interrupt or reset.  
The MCU can be brought out of the STOP Mode by only one of the following:  
• IRQ pin external interrupt  
• Externally or internally generated RESET  
• Falling edge on any Port A or Port C pin (if enabled)  
• Rising edge on the MDLC BUS pin  
When exiting the STOP Mode, the internal oscillator will resume after a 4064 internal  
processor clock cycle oscillator stabilization delay, as shown in Figure 8-1.  
NOTE: Execution of the STOP instruction with the proper mask option will cause  
the oscillator to stop and therefore disable the COP Watchdog Timer. If  
the COP Watchdog Timer is to be used, the STOP Mode should be  
disabled by selecting the proper mask option. See 6.2.3.4 COP  
WATCHDOG TIMER CONSIDERATIONS for more details.  
SECTION 8: LOW-POWER MODES  
MOTOROLA  
Page 57  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
1
OSC1  
t
t
RL  
RESET  
LIH  
2
IRQ  
t
4064 t  
ILCH  
cyc  
3
IRQ  
MDLC BUS  
IDLE  
INTERNAL  
CLOCK  
INTERNAL  
ADDRESS  
BUS  
3FFE  
3FFE  
3FFE  
3FFE  
3FFF  
Notes:  
RESET OR INTERRUPT  
VECTOR FETCH  
1. Represents the internal gating of the OSC1 pin.  
2. IRQ pin edge-sensitive mask option or Port A/C pin.  
3. IRQ pin level and edge sensitive mask option.  
Figure 8-1: Stop Recovery Timing Diagram  
MOTOROLA  
Page 58  
SECTION 8: LOW-POWER MODES  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
STOP  
WAIT  
STOP Mask  
Option En-  
abled?  
N
Reset Chip  
Y
Stop External Oscillator,  
Stop Internal Timer Clock,  
and Reset Startup Delay  
External Oscillator Active,  
and Internal  
Timer Clock Active  
Stop Internal Processor Clock,  
Clear I-Bit in CCR,  
Stop Internal Processor Clock,  
Clear I-Bit in CCR,  
Y
Y
External  
External  
RESET?  
RESET?  
N
N
IRQ  
External  
IRQ  
External  
Y
Y
Interrupt?  
Interrupt?  
Restart External Oscillator,  
and Stabilization Delay  
N
N
TIMER  
Internal  
MDLC  
Bus  
Y
Y
Interrupt?  
Edge?  
End  
of Startup  
N
N
Y
Delay  
MDLC  
Bus  
Edge?  
Port A  
or C Falling  
Edge?  
Y
Y
N
Restart  
Internal Processor Clock  
N
N
Port A  
or C Falling  
Edge?  
1. Fetch Reset Vector  
or  
2. Service Interrupt  
a. Stack  
Y
N
b. Set I-Bit  
c. Vector to Interrupt Routine  
Figure 8-2: STOP/WAIT Flowcharts  
8.1.2  
WAIT INSTRUCTION  
The WAIT instruction places the MCU in a low-power mode, which consumes more power  
than the STOP Mode. In the WAIT Mode the internal processor clock is halted, suspending  
all processor and internal bus activity. Internal timer clocks remain active, permitting  
interrupts to be generated from the timer or a reset to be generated from the COP  
Watchdog Timer. Execution of the WAIT instruction automatically clears the I-bit in the  
Condition Code Register. All other registers, memory, and input/output lines remain in their  
previous states.  
SECTION 8: LOW-POWER MODES  
MOTOROLA  
Page 59  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
If timer interrupts are enabled, a TIMER interrupt will cause the processor to exit the WAIT  
Mode and resume normal operation. The Timer may be used to generate a periodic exit  
from the WAIT Mode. The MCU can be brought out of the WAIT Mode by one of the  
following:  
• TIMER interrupt from either timer  
• IRQ pin external interrupt  
• Externally or internally generated RESET  
• Falling edge on any Port A or Port C pin (if enabled)  
• Rising edge on the MDLC BUS pin  
MOTOROLA  
Page 60  
SECTION 8: LOW-POWER MODES  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 9  
PARALLEL I/O  
In the Single-Chip Mode there are 28 bidirectional I/O lines arranged as three 8-bit I/O ports  
(Ports A, B and C) and one 4-bit I/O port (Port F), and 16 input only lines arranged as two  
8-bit ports (Ports D and E). The individual bits in the I/O ports are programmable as either  
inputs or outputs under software control by the data direction registers (DDRs). The Port A  
and Port C pins also have the additional properties of acting as additional IRQ interrupt  
input sources.  
9.1  
PORT A AND PORT C  
Port A and Port C are 8-bit bidirectional ports which share all of their pins with the IRQ  
interrupt system as shown in Figure 9-1. Each pin is controlled by the corresponding bits in  
a data direction register and a data register. The Port A Data Register is located at address  
$0000.The Port C Data Register is located at address $0002. The Port A Data Direction  
Register (DDRA) is located at address $0004. The Port C Data Direction Register (DDRC)  
is located at address $0006. Reset clears DDRA and DDRC. The Data Registers are  
unaffected by reset.  
Read $0004/06  
Write $0004/06  
Data Direction  
Register Bit  
I/O  
Pin  
Write $0000/02  
Read $0000/02  
Output  
Data  
Register Bit  
Internal HC05  
Data Bus  
Reset  
(RST)  
to IRQ interrupt system  
Port A/C Bits 0 thru 7  
Figure 9-1: Port A and Port C I/O Circuitry  
PORT A/C DATA REGISTERS  
9.1.1  
Each Port A/C I/O pin has a corresponding bit in the Port A/C Data Register. When a Port  
A/C pin is programmed as an output the state of the corresponding data register bit  
determines the state of the output pin. When a Port A/C pin is programmed as an input, any  
SECTION 9: PARALLEL I/O  
MOTOROLA  
Page 61  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
read of the Port A/C Data Register will return the logic state of the corresponding I/O pin.  
The Port A/C data register is unaffected by reset.  
9.1.2  
PORT A/C DATA DIRECTION REGISTER  
Each Port A/C I/O pin may be programmed as an input by clearing the corresponding bit in  
the DDRA/C, or programmed as an output by setting the corresponding bit in the DDRA/C.  
The DDRA can be accessed at address $0004. The DDRC can be accessed at address  
$0006. The DDRA and DDRC are cleared by reset.  
9.1.3  
PORT A/C I/O PIN INTERRUPTS  
The inputs of all eight bits of Port A and Port C are ANDed into the IRQ input of the CPU.  
Each port has its own interrupt request latch to enable the user to differentiate between the  
IRQ sources. The port IRQ inputs are falling edge sensitive only. Any Port A or Port C pin  
can be disabled as an interrupt input by setting the corresponding DDR bit. Any Port A or  
Port C pins that are outputs will not cause a port interrupt when the pin transitions from a 1  
to a 0. However, since all inputs pins are ANDed together to form the interrupt signal, any  
input pin that remains low will inhibit the interrupt flag bit from being set when subsequent  
pins transition low.  
NOTE: The BIH and BIL instructions will only apply to the level on the IRQ pin  
itself, and not to the internal IRQ input to the CPU. Therefore BIH and BIL  
cannot be used to obtain the result of the logical combination of the eight  
pins of Port A or Port C.  
9.2  
PORT B  
Port B is an 8-bit bidirectional port. Each Port B pin is controlled by the corresponding bits  
in a data direction register and a data register as shown in Figure 9-2. PB6 and PB7 are  
shared with 16 Bit Timer functions. See SECTION 11 16-BIT TIMER. The Port B Data  
Register is located at address $0001. The Port B Data Direction Register (DDRB) is located  
at address $0005. Reset clears the DDRB register. The Port B Data Register is unaffected  
by reset  
MOTOROLA  
Page 62  
SECTION 9: PARALLEL I/O  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
.
Read $0005  
Write $0005  
Data Direction  
Register Bit  
I/O  
Pin  
Write $0001  
Read $0001  
Output  
Data  
Register Bit  
Internal HC05  
Data Bus  
Reset  
(RST)  
Figure 9-2: Port B I/O Circuitry  
9.2.1  
PORT B DATA REGISTER  
Each Port B I/O pin has a corresponding bit in the Port B Data Register. When a Port B pin  
is programmed as an output the state of the corresponding data register bit determines the  
state of the output pin. When a Port B pin is programmed as an input, any read of the Port  
B Data Register will return the logic state of the corresponding I/O pin. The Port B data  
register is unaffected by reset. PB7 serves as the TCAP input and PB6 serves as the TCMP  
output if the OCE bit in the MISC Register is set. See 7.2 MISCELLANEOUS REGISTER.  
9.2.2  
PORT B DATA DIRECTION REGISTER  
Each Port B I/O pin may be programmed as an input by clearing the corresponding bit in  
the DDRB, or programmed as an output by setting the corresponding bit in the DDRB. The  
DDRB can be accessed at address $0005. The DDRB is cleared by reset.  
9.3  
PORT D AND PORT E  
Port D is an 8-bit input only port that shares all of its pins with the A/D converter (AN0  
through AN7) as shown in Figure 1-6. The Port D Data Register is located at address  
$0003. Port E is an 8-bit input only port which also shares all of its pins with the A/D  
converter (AN8 through AN15). The Port E Data Register is located at address $002B.  
When the A/D converter is active, one of these 16 input ports may be selected by the A/D  
multiplexer for conversion. A logical read of a selected input port will always return 0.  
NOTE: Port E is not bonded out in the 56-pin SDIP packaged version.  
SECTION 9: PARALLEL I/O  
MOTOROLA  
Page 63  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
V
SS  
Read $0003/2B  
Input  
Pin  
To A/D Channel Select Logic  
To A/D Sampling Circuitry  
Internal HC05  
Data Bus  
Figure 9-3: Port D and Port E Circuitry  
9.4  
PORT F  
Port F is a 4-bit bidirectional port which shares all of its pins with the SPI subsystem. If the  
SPI is enabled, Port F3-1 are disabled as regular I/O pins. PF0 can still function as an  
output if the DDR bit is set. Each Port F pin is controlled by the corresponding bits in a data  
direction register and a data register. The Port F Data Register is located at address $002C.  
The Port F Data Direction Register (DDRF) is located at address $002E. Reset clears the  
DDRF register. The Port F Data Register is unaffected by reset. Port F is shared with the  
SPI.  
9.4.1  
PORT F DATA REGISTER  
Each Port F I/O pin has a corresponding bit in the Port F Data Register. When a Port F pin  
is programmed as an output the state of the corresponding data register bit determines the  
state of the output pin. When a Port F pin is programmed as an input, any read of the Port  
F Data Register will return the logic state of the corresponding I/O pin. The Port F data  
register may be read even if the SPI subsystem is enabled. The Port F data register is  
unaffected by reset.  
9.4.2  
PORT F DATA DIRECTION REGISTER  
Each Port F I/O pin may be programmed as an input by clearing the corresponding bit in  
the DDRF, or programmed as an output by setting the corresponding bit in the DDRF. The  
DDRF can be accessed at address $002E. If the SPI subsystem is enabled (SPE bit is set),  
the DDRF bit corresponding to PF0 will determine the function of the PF0 pin. If DDRF0 is  
cleared, the PF0 pin functions as a SS (slave select) input to the SPI. If DDRF0 is set, then  
PF0 can serve as a normal output pin. When the SPI subsystem is enabled, the DDRF3-1  
bits are set or cleared according to the required pin function. The DDRF is cleared by reset.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 64  
SECTION 9: PARALLEL I/O  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 10  
A/D CONVERTER  
The MC68HC705V7 includes a 16 channel, 8-bit, multiplexed input, successive  
approximation A/D converter. When the device is packaged (in a 56-pin SDIP), pin number  
restrictions require that 8 channels, AN8 through AN15, are not bonded out.  
10.1 ANALOG SECTION  
10.1.1  
RATIOMETRIC CONVERSION  
The A/D is ratiometric, with two dedicated pins supplying the reference voltages (V  
REFH  
and V  
. An input voltage equal to V  
converts to $FF (full scale) and an input  
REFL  
REFH  
)
voltage equal to V  
converts to $00. An input voltage greater than V  
will convert  
REFL  
REFH  
to $FF with no overflow indication. For ratiometric conversions, the source of each analog  
input should use V  
as the supply voltage and be referenced to V  
.
REFH  
REFL  
10.1.2  
V
AND V  
REFH REFL  
The reference supply for the converter uses two dedicated pins rather than being driven by  
the system power supply lines because the voltage drops in the bonding wires of those  
heavily loaded pins would degrade the accuracy of the A/D conversion. V  
and V  
REFH  
REFL  
can be any voltage between V  
and V  
, as long as V  
> V  
; however, the  
SSA1  
CCA  
REFH  
REFL  
accuracy of conversions is tested and guaranteed only for V  
= V  
SSA1  
REFL  
and V  
= V  
.
REFH  
CCA  
10.1.3  
ACCURACY AND PRECISION  
The 8-bit conversions shall be accurate to within ± 1 1/2 LSB including quantization.  
10.2 CONVERSION PROCESS  
The A/D reference inputs are applied to a precision internal digital-to-analog converter.  
Control logic drives this D/A and the analog output is successively compared to the  
selected analog input which was sampled at the beginning of the conversion time. The  
conversion process is monotonic and has no missing codes.  
10.3 DIGITAL SECTION  
10.3.1  
CONVERSION TIMES  
Each channel of conversion takes 32 clock cycles, which must be at a frequency equal to  
or greater than 1 MHz.  
SECTION 10: A/D CONVERTER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 65  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
10.3.2 INTERNAL VS. MASTER OSCILLATOR  
If the MCU bus (E clock) frequency is less than 1.0 MHz, an internal RC oscillator  
(nominally 1.5 MHz) must be used for the A/D conversion clock. This selection is made by  
setting the ADRC bit in the A/D Status and Control Registers to 1. In STOP mode, the  
internal RC oscillator is turned off automatically, though the A/D subsystem remains  
enabled (ADON remains set). In WAIT mode the A/D subsystem remains functional. See  
10.6 A/D DURING WAIT MODE.  
When the internal RC oscillator is being used as the conversion clock, three limitations  
apply:  
1. The Conversion Complete Flag (COCO) must be used to determine when  
a conversion sequence has been completed, due to the frequency  
tolerance of the RC oscillator and its asynchronism with regard to the  
MCU E clock.  
2. The conversion process runs at the nominal 1.5 MHz rate but the  
conversion results must be transferred to the MCU result registers  
synchronously with the MCU E clock so conversion time is limited to a  
maximum of one channel per E cycle.  
3. If the system clock is running faster than the RC oscillator, the RC  
oscillator should be turned off, and the system clock used as the  
conversion clock.  
10.3.3  
MULTI-CHANNEL OPERATION  
A multiplexer allows the A/D converter to select one of sixteen external analog signals and  
four internal reference sources.  
10.4 A/D STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER (ADSCR)  
The following paragraphs describe the function of the A/D Status and Control Register.  
$1E  
COCO  
0
ADRC  
0
ADON  
0
CH4  
0
CH3  
0
CH2  
0
CH1  
0
CH0  
0
RESET:  
Figure 10-1: A/D Status and Control Register  
COCO - Conversions Complete  
10.4.1  
This read-only status bit is set when a conversion is completed, indicating that the A/D Data  
Register contains valid results. This bit is cleared whenever the A/D Status and Control  
Register is written and a new conversion is automatically started, or whenever the A/D Data  
Register is read. Once a conversion has been started by writing to the A/D Status and  
Control Register, conversions of the selected channel will continue every 32 cycles until the  
A/D Status and Control Register is written again. In this continuous conversion mode the  
A/D Data Register will be filled with new data, and the COCO bit set, every 32 cycles. Data  
from the previous conversion will be overwritten regardless of the state of the COCO bit  
prior to writing.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 66  
SECTION 10: A/D CONVERTER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
10.4.2  
ADRC - RC Oscillator Control  
When ADRC is set, the A/D section runs on the internal RC oscillator instead of the CPU  
clock. The RC oscillator requires a time t  
during this time.  
to stabilize, and results can be inaccurate  
RCON  
10.4.3  
ADON - A/D On  
When the A/D is turned on (ADON = 1), it requires a time t  
for the current sources to  
ADON  
stabilize, and results can be inaccurate during this time. This bit turns on the charge pump.  
10.4.4 CH4:CH0 - Channel Select Bits  
CH4, CH3, CH2, CH1, and CH0 form a 5-bit field which is used to select one of twenty A/  
D channels, including four internal references. Channels $0-7 correspond to Port D input  
pins on the MCU. Channels $8-F correspond to Port E input pins on the MCU and are not  
bonded out in 56 pin packaged parts. Channels $10-13 are used for internal reference  
points. In Single-Chip Mode, channel $13 is reserved and converts to $00. The following  
table shows the signals selected by the channel select field.  
Table 10-1: A/D Channel Assignments  
CH4:CH0  
Signal  
00-07  
08-0F  
10  
AN0-7  
AN8-15  
VREFH  
*
*
11  
(VREFH-  
VREFL)/2  
12  
13  
VREFL  
*
Factory  
Test  
14  
Unused  
* Accuracy not guaranteed for internal channels  
10.5 A/D DATA REGISTERS  
An 8-bit result register is provided. This register is updated each time the COCO bit is set.  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
$1D  
Figure 10-2: A/D Data Register  
SECTION 10: A/D CONVERTER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 67  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
10.6 A/D DURING WAIT MODE  
The A/D converter continues normal operation during WAIT mode. To decrease power  
consumption during WAIT, it is recommended that both the ADON and ADRC bits in the A/  
D Status and Control Registers be cleared if the A/D converter is not being used. If the A/  
D converter is in use and the system clock rate is above 1.0 MHz, it is recommended that  
the ADRC bit be cleared.  
NOTE: As the A/D converter continues to function normally in WAIT mode, the  
COCO bit is not cleared.  
10.7 A/D DURING STOP MODE  
In STOP mode the comparator and charge pump are turned off and the A/D ceases to  
function. Any pending conversion is aborted. When the clocks begin oscillation upon  
leaving the STOP mode, a finite amount of time passes before the A/D circuits stabilize  
enough to provide conversions to the specified accuracy. Normally, the delays built into the  
device when coming out of STOP mode are sufficient for this purpose, therefore no explicit  
delays need to be built into the software.  
NOTE: Although the comparator and charge pump are disabled in STOP mode,  
the A/D Data and Status/Control registers are not modified. Disabling the  
A/D prior to entering STOP mode will not effect the STOP mode current  
consumption.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 68  
SECTION 10: A/D CONVERTER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 11  
16-BIT TIMER  
The timer consists of a 16-bit, free-running counter driven by a fixed divide-by-four  
prescaler. This timer can be used for many purposes, including input waveform  
measurements while simultaneously generating an output waveform. Pulse widths can  
vary from several microseconds to many seconds. Figure 11-1: 16-Bit Timer Block  
Diagram.  
Because the timer has a 16-bit architecture, each specific functional segment (capability)  
is represented by two registers. These registers contain the high and low byte of that  
functional segment. Access of the high byte inhibits that specific timer function until the low  
byte is also accessed.  
NOTE: The I bit in the CCR should be set while manipulating both the high and  
low byte register of a specific timer function to ensure that an interrupt  
does not occur.  
Internal Bus  
Internal  
Processor  
Clock  
High  
Byte  
Low  
Byte  
8-Bit  
Buffer  
∏∏∏  
/4  
High Low  
Byte Byte  
$16  
$17  
Output  
Compare  
Register  
High  
Byte  
Low  
Byte  
Input  
Capture  
Register  
16-Bit Free  
Running  
Counter  
$14  
$15  
$18  
$19  
Counter  
Alternate  
Register  
$1A  
$1B  
Edge  
Detect  
Circuit  
Overflow  
Detect  
Circuit  
Output  
Compare  
Circuit  
D
Q
CLK  
C
Timer  
Output  
Level  
Reg.  
$13  
Status ICF OCF TOF  
Reg.  
Timer  
Control RESET  
Reg.  
$12  
ICIE OCIE TOIE IEDG OLVL  
Output Edge  
Level Input  
(TCMP) (TCAP)  
PB6 PB7  
Interrupt  
Circuit  
Figure 11-1: 16-Bit Timer Block Diagram  
SECTION 11: 16-BIT TIMER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 69  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
11.1 COUNTER REGISTER - $18:$19, $1A:$1B  
The key element in the programmable timer is a 16-bit, free-running counter or counter  
register, preceded by a prescaler that divides the internal processor clock by four. The  
prescaler gives the timer a resolution of 2.0 microseconds if the internal bus clock is 2.0  
MHz. The counter is incremented during the low portion of the internal bus clock. Software  
can read the counter at any time without affecting its value.  
The double-byte, free-running counter can be read from either of two locations, $18-$19  
(counter register) or $1A-$1B (counter alternate register). A read from only the least  
significant byte (LSB) of the free-running counter ($19, $1B) receives the count value at the  
time of the read. If a read of the free-running counter or counter alternate register first  
addresses the most significant byte (MSB) ($18, $1A), the LSB ($19, $1B) is transferred to  
a buffer. This buffer value remains fixed after the first MSB read, even if the user reads the  
MSB several times. This buffer is accessed when reading the free-running counter or  
counter alternate register LSB ($19 or $1B) and, thus, completes a read sequence of the  
total counter value. In reading either the free-running counter or counter alternate register,  
if the MSB is read, the LSB must also be read to complete the sequence.  
The counter alternate register differs from the counter register in one respect: a read of the  
counter register MSB can clear the timer overflow flag (TOF). Therefore, the counter  
alternate register can be read at any time without the possibility of missing timer overflow  
interrupts due to clearing of the TOF.  
The free-running counter is configured to $FFFC during reset and is a read-only register  
but only when the timer is enabled. During a power-on reset, the counter is also preset to  
$FFFC and begins running only after the TON bit in the TIMER control register is set.  
Because the free-running counter is 16 bits preceded by a fixed divided-by-four prescaler,  
the value in the free-running counter repeats every 262,144 internal bus clock cycles.  
When the counter rolls over from $FFFF to $0000, the TOF bit is set. An interrupt can also  
be enabled when counter roll-over occurs by setting its interrupt enable bit (TOIE).  
NOTE: The I bit in the CCR should be set while manipulating both the high and  
low byte register of a specific timer function to ensure that an interrupt  
does not occur.  
11.2 OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER - $16:$17  
The 16-bit output compare register is made up of two 8-bit registers at locations $16 (MSB)  
and $17 (LSB). The output compare register is used for several purposes, such as  
indicating when a period of time has elapsed. All bits are readable and writable and are not  
altered by the timer hardware or reset. If the compare function is not needed, the two bytes  
of the output compare register can be used as storage locations.  
The output compare register contents are continually compared with the contents of the  
free-running counter. If a match is found, the corresponding output compare flag (OCF) bit  
is set and the corresponding output level (OLVL) bit is clocked to an output level register.  
The output compare register values and the output level bit should be changed after each  
successful comparison to establish a new elapsed time-out. An interrupt can also  
MOTOROLA  
Page 70  
SECTION 11: 16-BIT TIMER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
accompany a successful output compare provided the corresponding interrupt enable bit  
(OCIE) is set. After a processor write cycle to the output compare register containing the  
MSB ($16), the output compare function is inhibited until the LSB ($17) is also written. The  
user must write both bytes (locations) if the MSB is written first. A write made only to the  
LSB ($17) will not inhibit the compare function. The free-running counter is updated every  
four internal bus clock cycles. The minimum time required to update the output compare  
register is a function of the program rather than the internal hardware.  
The processor can write to either byte of the output compare register without affecting the  
other byte. The output level (OLVL) bit is clocked to the output level register regardless of  
whether the output compare flag (OCF) is set or clear.  
11.3 INPUT CAPTURE REGISTER - $14:$15  
Two 8-bit registers, which make up the 16-bit input capture register, are read-only and are  
used to latch the value of the free-running counter after the corresponding input capture  
edge detector senses a defined transition. The level transition that triggers the counter  
transfer is defined by the corresponding input edge bit (IEDG). Reset does not affect the  
contents of the input capture register.  
The result obtained by an input capture will be one more than the value of the free-running  
counter on the rising edge of the internal bus clock preceding the external transition. This  
delay is required for internal synchronization. Resolution is one count of the free-running  
counter, which is four internal bus clock cycles.  
The free-running counter contents are transferred to the input capture register on each  
proper signal transition regardless of whether the input capture flag (ICF) is set or clear.  
The input capture register always contains the free-running counter value that corresponds  
to the most recent input capture.  
After a read of the input capture register MSB ($14), the counter transfer is inhibited until  
the LSB ($15) is also read. This characteristic causes the time used in the input capture  
software routine and its interaction with the main program to determine the minimum pulse  
period. A read of the input capture register LSB ($15) does not inhibit the free-running  
counter transfer since they occur on opposite edges of the internal bus clock.  
NOTE: The Input Capture pin (TCAP) and the Output Compare pin (TCMP) are  
shared with PB7 and PB6 respectively. The timer’s TCAP input is always  
connected to PB7. PB6 is the timer’s TCMP pin if the OCE bit in the  
MISCELLANEOUS control register is set. See 7.2.2OCE - Output  
compare enable.  
SECTION 11: 16-BIT TIMER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 71  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
11.4 TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (TCR) - $12  
The TCR is a read/write register containing six control bits. Three bits control interrupts  
associated with the timer status register flags ICF, OCF and TOF.  
$12  
ICIE  
0
OCIE  
0
TOIE  
0
0
0
0
0
TON  
0
IEDG  
0
OLVL  
0
RESET  
Figure 11-2: Timer Control Register - $12  
11.4.1  
11.4.2  
11.4.3  
11.4.4  
ICIE - Input Capture Interrupt Enable  
1 - Interrupt enabled  
0 - Interrupt disabled  
OCIE - Output Compare Interrupt Enable  
1 - Interrupt enabled  
0 - Interrupt disabled  
TOIE - Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable  
1 - Interrupt enabled  
0 - Interrupt disabled  
TON - Timer On  
When disabled, the timer is initialized to the reset condition.  
1 - Timer enabled  
0 - Timer disabled  
11.4.5  
IEDG - Input Edge  
Value of input edge determines which level transition on TCAP pin will trigger free-  
running counter transfer to the input capture register. Reset clears this bit.  
1 - Positive edge  
0 - Negative edge  
11.4.6  
OLVL - Output Level  
Value of output level is clocked into output level register by the next successful  
output compare and will appear on the TCMP pin.  
1 - High output  
0 - Low output  
11.5 TIMER STATUS REGISTER (TSR) - $13  
The TSR is a read-only register containing three status flag bits.  
$13  
ICF  
0
OCF  
0
TOF  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RESET  
Figure 11-3: Timer Status Register - $13  
SECTION 11: 16-BIT TIMER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 72  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
11.5.1  
ICF - Input Capture Flag  
1 - Flag set when selected polarity edge is sensed by input capture edge  
detector  
0 - Flag cleared when TSR and input capture low register ($15) are  
accessed  
Reset clears this bit.  
11.5.2 OCF - Output Compare Flag  
1 - Flag set when output compare register contents match the free-running  
counter contents  
0 - Flag cleared when TSR and output compare low register ($17) are  
accessed  
Reset clears this bit.  
11.5.3  
TOF - Timer Overflow Flag  
1 - Flag set when free-running counter transition from $FFFF to $0000  
occurs  
0 - Flag cleared when TSR and counter low register ($19) are accessed  
Reset clears this bit.  
11.5.4  
Bits 0-4 - Not used  
Always read zero.  
Accessing the timer status register satisfies the first condition required to clear status bits.  
The remaining step is to access the register corresponding to the status bit.  
A problem can occur when using the timer overflow function and reading the free-running  
counter at random times to measure an elapsed time. Without incorporating the proper  
precautions into software, the timer overflow flag could unintentionally be cleared if:  
1. The timer status register is read or written when TOF is set, and  
2. The MSB of the free-running counter is read but not for the purpose of  
servicing the flag.  
The counter alternate register at address $1A and $1B contains the same value as the free-  
running counter (at address $18 and $19); therefore, this alternate register can be read at  
any time without affecting the timer overflow flag in the timer status register.  
11.6 TIMER DURING WAIT MODE  
The CPU clock halts during the WAIT mode, but the timer remains active if turned on prior  
to entering wait mode. If interrupts are enabled, a timer interrupt will cause the processor  
to exit the WAIT mode.  
11.7 TIMER DURING STOP MODE  
In the STOP mode, the timer stops counting and holds the last count value if STOP is exited  
by an interrupt. If RESET is used, the counter is forced to $FFFC. During STOP, if the  
TIMER is on and at least one valid input capture edge occurs at the TCAP pin, the input  
SECTION 11: 16-BIT TIMER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 73  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
capture detect circuit is armed. This does not set any timer flags nor wake up the MCU, but  
when the MCU does wake up, there is an active input capture flag and data from the first  
valid edge that occurred during the STOP mode. If RESET is used to exit STOP mode, then  
no input capture flag or data remains, even if a valid input capture edge occurred.  
t
t
t
TH  
TLTL  
TL  
TCAP  
Figure 11-4: TCAP Timing  
MOTOROLA  
Page 74  
SECTION 11: 16-BIT TIMER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 12  
CORE TIMER  
The Core Timer for this device is a 12-stage multifunctional ripple counter. The features  
include Timer Over Flow, Power-On Reset (POR), Real Time Interrupt (RTI), and COP  
Watchdog Timer.  
Internal Bus  
8
8
COP  
Clear  
Internal Peripheral Clock (Ε)  
2
E/2  
CTCR  
$09 Core Timer Counter Register (CTCR)  
9
10  
E / 2  
E/2  
5-bit counter  
div  
/4  
12  
E / 2  
TCBP  
14  
E / 2  
13  
E / 2  
12  
E / 2  
11  
E / 2  
POR  
RTI Select Circuit  
Overflow  
Detect  
Circuit  
RTI  
out  
CTCSR  
Timer Control &  
$08  
CTOF RTIF TOFE RTIE TOFC RTFC RT1 RT0  
Status Register  
COP Watchdog  
Timer (÷8)  
Interrupt Circuit  
3
2
To Interrupt  
Logic  
To Reset  
Logic  
Figure 12-1: Core Timer Block Diagram  
SECTION 12: CORE TIMER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 75  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
As seen in Figure 6-1, the internal peripheral clock is divided by four then drives an 8-bit  
ripple counter. The value of this 8-bit ripple counter can be read by the CPU at any time by  
accessing the Core Timer Counter Register (CTCR) at address $09. A timer overflow  
function is implemented on the last stage of this counter, giving a possible interrupt rate of  
the Internal Peripheral clock(E)/1024. This point is then followed by two more stages, with  
the resulting clock (E/2048) driving the Real Time Interrupt circuit (RTI). The RTI circuit  
consists of three divider stages with a 1 of 4 selector. The output of the RTI circuit is further  
divided by eight to drive the mask optional COP Watchdog Timer circuit. The RTI rate  
selector bits, and the RTI and CTOF enable bits and flags are located in the Timer Control  
and Status Register at location $08.  
12.1 CORE TIMER CTRL & STATUS REGISTER (CTCSR) $08  
The CTCSR contains the timer interrupt flag, the timer interrupt enable bits, and the real  
time interrupt rate select bits. Figure 12-2 shows the value of each bit in the CTCSR when  
coming out of reset.  
$08  
CTOF  
0
RTIF  
0
TOFE  
0
RTIE  
0
TOFC  
0
RTFC  
0
RT1  
1
RT0  
1
RESET:  
Figure 12-2: Core Timer Control and Status Register  
CTOF - Core Timer Over Flow  
12.1.1  
CTOF is a read-only status bit set when the 8-bit ripple counter rolls over from $FF to $00.  
Clearing the CTOF is done by writing a ‘1’ to TOFC. Writing to this bit has no effect. Reset  
clears CTOF.  
12.1.2  
RTIF - Real Time Interrupt Flag  
The Real Time Interrupt circuit consists of a three stage divider and a 1 of 4 selector. The  
clock frequency that drives the RTI circuit is E/2**11 (or E/2048) with three additional  
divider stages giving a maximum interrupt period of 7.8 milliseconds at a bus rate of 2.1  
MHz. RTIF is a clearable, read-only status bit and is set when the output of the chosen (1  
of 4 selection) stage goes active. Clearing the RTIF is done by writing a “1” to RTFC.  
Writing has no effect on this bit. Reset clears RTIF.  
12.1.3  
TOFE - Timer Over Flow Enable  
When this bit is set, a CPU interrupt request is generated when the CTOF bit is set. Reset  
clears this bit.  
12.1.4  
RTIE - Real Time Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is set, a CPU interrupt request is generated when the RTIF bit is set. Reset  
clears this bit.  
12.1.5  
TOFC - Timer Over Flow Flag Clear  
When a “1” is written to this bit, CTOF is cleared. Writing a “0” has no effect on the CTOF  
bit. This bit always reads as zero.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 76  
SECTION 12: CORE TIMER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
12.1.6  
RTFC - Real Time Interrupt Flag Clear  
When a “1” is written to this bit, RTIF is cleared. Writing a “0” has no effect on the RTIF bit.  
This bit always reads as zero.  
12.1.7  
RT1:RT0 - Real Time Interrupt Rate Select  
These two bits select one of four taps from the Real Time Interrupt circuit. Table 12-1 shows  
the available interrupt rates with a 2.1 and 1.05MHz bus clock. Reset sets these two bits  
which selects the lowest periodic rate and gives the maximum time in which to alter these  
bits if necessary. Care should be taken when altering RT0 and RT1 if the time-out period  
is imminent or uncertain. If the selected tap is modified during a cycle in which the counter  
is switching, an RTIF could be missed or an additional one could be generated. To avoid  
problems, the COP should be cleared before changing RTI taps.  
Table 12-1: RTI and COP Rates at 2.1 MHz  
RTI RATE  
RT1:RT0  
MIN. COP RATES  
2.1 MHz  
0.97 ms  
1.05 MHz  
1.95 ms  
2.1 MHz  
1.05 MHz  
13.65ms  
11  
14 11  
2 /E  
(2 -2 )/E  
00  
01  
10  
11  
6.83 ms  
13.65 ms  
27.31 ms  
54.61 ms  
12  
15 12  
2 /E  
(2 -2 )/E  
1.95 ms  
3.90 ms  
7.80 ms  
3.90 ms  
7.80 ms  
15.60 ms  
27.31ms  
54.61ms  
109.23ms  
13  
16 13  
2 /E  
(2 -2 )/E  
14  
17 14  
2 /E  
(2 -2 )/E  
12.2 COMPUTER OPERATING PROPERLY (COP) RESET  
The COP watchdog timer function is implemented on this device by using the output of the  
RTI circuit and further dividing it by eight. The minimum COP reset rates are listed in Table  
12-1. If the COP circuit times out, an internal reset is generated and the normal reset vector  
is fetched. Preventing a COP time-out, or clearing the COP, is accomplished by writing a  
“0” to bit 0 of address $3FF0. When the COP is cleared, only the final divide by eight stage  
(output of the RTI) is cleared.  
If the COP watchdog timer is allowed to time-out, an internal reset is generated to reset the  
MCU. In addition the RESET pin will be pulled low for a minimum of 3 E Clock cycle for  
emulation purposes. During a chip reset (regardless of the source), the entire Core Timer  
counter chain is cleared.  
The COP will remain enabled after execution of the WAIT instruction and all associated  
operations apply. If the STOP instruction is disabled, execution of STOP instruction will  
cause an internal reset.  
This COP’s objective is to make it impossible for this part to become “stuck” or “locked-up”  
and to be sure the COP is able to “rescue” the part from any situation where it might entrap  
itself in an abnormal or unintended behavior. This function is a mask option.  
SECTION 12: CORE TIMER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 77  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
12.3 CORE TIMER COUNTER REGISTER (CTCR) $09  
The Timer Counter Register is a read-only register which contains the current value of the  
8-bit ripple counter at the beginning of the timer chain. This counter is clocked by the CPU  
clock (E/4) and can be used for various functions including a software input capture.  
Extended time periods can be attained using the TOF function to increment a temporary  
RAM storage location thereby simulating a 16-bit (or more) counter.  
$09  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Figure 12-3: Timer Counter Register  
The power-on cycle clears the entire counter chain and begins clocking the counter. After  
4064 cycles, the power-on reset circuit is released which again clears the counter chain and  
allows the device to come out of reset. At this point, if RESET is not asserted, the timer will  
start counting up from zero and normal device operation will begin. When RESET is  
asserted anytime during operation (other than POR), the counter chain will be cleared.  
12.4 TIMER DURING WAIT MODE  
The CPU clock halts during the WAIT mode, but the timer remains active. If interrupts are  
enabled, a timer interrupt will cause the processor to exit the WAIT mode. The COP is  
always enabled while in user mode.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 78  
SECTION 12: CORE TIMER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 13  
PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR  
The pulse width modulator (PWM) system has one 6-bit channel (PWMA). Preceding the  
6-bit (÷64) PWM are two programmable prescalers.The PWM frequency is selected by  
choosing the desired divide option from the programmable prescalers. Note that the PWM  
clock input is f , which is twice the bus frequency. The PWM frequency will be f  
/
osc  
osc  
(PSA+PSB+64) where PSA and PSB are the values selected by the A and B prescaler and  
64 comes from the 6-bit modulus counter. See Table 13-1 for precise values. E is the  
internal bus frequency fixed to half of the external oscillator frequency.  
f
osc  
RCLK  
SCLK  
Integer divide  
6-BIT COUNTER  
÷1, ÷8, ÷16  
÷1-16  
(÷64)  
PWM  
PIN LOGIC  
MODULUS &  
COMPARATOR  
PWMA  
PWM DATA  
REGISTER  
PWM DATA  
BUFFER  
PWM CONTROL REGISTER and BUFFER  
Figure 13-1: PWM Block Diagram  
13.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION  
The PWM is capable of generating signals from 0% to 100% duty cycle. A $00 in the PWM  
Data Register yields an “low” output (0%), but a $3F yields a duty of 63/64. To achieve the  
100% duty (“high” output), the polarity control bit is set to zero while the data register has  
$00 in it.  
When not in use, the PWM system can be shut off to save power by clearing the clock rate  
select bits PSA0 and PSA1 in PWMCR.  
Writes to the PWM data register are buffered and can therefore be performed at any time  
without affecting the output signal. When the PWM subsystem is enabled, a write to the  
PWM Control Register will become effective immediately.  
SECTION 13: PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR  
MOTOROLA  
Page 79  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
When the PWM subsystem is enabled, a write to the PWM Data Register will not become  
effective until the following condition has been met.  
• The end of the current PWM period has occurred, at which time the new  
data value is loaded into the PWM Data Register.  
However, should a write to the registers be performed when the PWM subsystem is  
disabled, the data is transferred immediately. All Registers are updated after the PWM Data  
Register is written to and the end of a PWM cycle occurs.  
The PWM output can have an active high or an active low pulse under software control  
using the POL (polarity) bit as shown in Figure 13-2 and Figure 13-3.  
T
$05  
$3F  
$1F  
PWM register = $x0  
Figure 13-2: PWM Waveform Examples (POL = 1)  
T
$05  
$3F  
$1F  
PWM register = $x0  
Figure 13-3: PWM Waveform Examples (POL = 0)  
MOTOROLA  
Page 80  
SECTION 13: PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
13.2 REGISTERS  
Associated with the PWM system, there is a PWM data register and a control register. The  
following registers can be written to and read at any time. Data written to the data register  
is held in a buffer and transferred to the PWM Data Register at the end of a PWM cycle.  
Reads of this register will always result in the read of the PWM Data Register and not the  
buffer.  
Upon RESET the user should write to the data register prior to enabling the PWM system  
(for example, prior to setting the PSA and PSB bits for PWM input clock rate). This will  
avoid an erroneous duty cycle from being driven. During regular user mode the user should  
write to the PWM Data data register after writing the PWM Control Register.  
Y
POR  
OR RESET  
N
Write PWM CONTROL  
Write PWM Data 1  
Initialize PWM Data 0  
Write PWM CONTROL  
Figure 13-4: PWM Write Sequences  
PWM CONTROL  
13.2.1  
PSA1  
0
PSA0  
0
--  
--  
--  
--  
PSB3  
0
PSB2  
0
PSB1  
PSB0  
0
$31  
RESET:  
0
Figure 13-5: PWM Control Register  
PSA1, PSA0, PSB3-PSB0- PWM Clock Rate  
These bits select the input clock rate and determines the period, as shown in Table 13-1.  
Note that some output frequencies can be obtained with more than one combination of PSA  
Table 13-1: PWM Clock Rate  
PSA1:PSA0  
PSB3-PSB0  
RCLK  
SCLK  
PWM OUT  
00  
01  
xxxx  
off  
off  
off  
0000-1111  
f
/1  
f
/1-f /16  
f
/64-  
osc  
osc  
osc  
osc  
f
/1024  
osc  
10  
0000-1111  
f
/8  
f
/8-f /128  
f
/512-  
osc  
osc  
osc  
osc  
f
/8192  
osc  
SECTION 13: PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR  
MOTOROLA  
Page 81  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
Table 13-1: PWM Clock Rate  
PSA1:PSA0  
PSB3-PSB0  
0000-1111  
RCLK  
/16  
SCLK  
PWM OUT  
/1024-  
11  
f
f
/16-f  
256  
/
f
osc  
osc  
osc  
osc  
f
/16384  
osc  
and PSB values. For instance a PWM output of E/512 can be obtained with either  
PSA1:PSA0 = 10 and PSB3-PSB0 = 0001 or PSA1:PSA0 = 01 and PSB3-PSB0 = 1000.  
This scheme allows for 38 unique frequency selections.  
13.2.2  
PWM DATA REGISTERS  
The PWM system has one 8-bit data register which hold the duty cycle for each PWM  
output in the least significant 6 bits. The data bits in this register are unaffected by RESET.  
$30  
POL  
1
-
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
RESET:  
Figure 13-6: PWM Data Register  
POL - PWM Polarity  
1 = PWM pulse is active high.  
0 = PWM pulse is active low.  
13.3 PWM DURING WAIT MODE  
The PWM continues normal operation during WAIT mode. To decrease power  
consumption during WAIT, it is recommended that the rate select bits in the PWM Control  
Register be cleared if the PWM is not being used.  
13.4 PWM DURING STOP MODE  
In STOP mode the oscillator is stopped causing the PWM to cease functioning. Any signal  
in process is aborted in whatever phase the signal happens to be in.  
13.5 PWM DURING RESET  
Upon RESET the PSA0 and PSA1 bits in PWM CONTROL are cleared. This disables the  
PWM system and sets the PWMA output low. The user should write to the data registers  
prior to enabling the PWM system (for example, prior to setting PSA1 or PSA0). This will  
avoid an erroneous duty cycle from being driven.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 82  
SECTION 13: PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 14  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE  
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) is an interface which allows several MC68HC05  
MCUs, or MC68HC05 MCU plus peripheral devices, to be interconnected within a single  
printed circuit board. In an SPI, separate wires are required for data and clock. In the SPI  
format, the clock is not included in the data stream and must be furnished as a separate  
signal. An SPI system may be configured in one containing one master MCU and several  
slave MCUs, or in a system in which an MCU is capable of being a master or a slave.  
Features include:  
• Full duplex, three-wire synchronous transfers  
• Master or slave operation  
• Internal MCU clock divided by 2 (maximum) master bit frequency  
• Internal MCU clock (maximum) slave bit frequency  
• Four programmable master bit rates  
• Programmable clock polarity and phase  
• End of transmission interrupt flag  
• Write collision flag protection  
• Master-Master mode fault protection capability  
14.1 SPI SIGNAL DESCRIPTION  
The four basic signals (MOSI, MISO, SCK, SS) are described in the following paragraphs.  
Each signal function is described for both the master and slave mode.  
SECTION 14: SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE  
MOTOROLA  
Page 83  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
The SPI forces the direction on some of the pin to output in order to function properly.  
SS  
SCK  
(CPOL=0, CPHA=0)  
SCK  
(CPOL=0, CPHA=1)  
SCK  
(CPOL=1, CPHA=0)  
SCK  
(CPOL=1, CPHA=1)  
MISO/MOSI  
MSB  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
INTERNAL STROBE FOR DATA CAPTURE (ALL MODES)  
Figure 14-1: Data Clock Timing Diagram  
Master In Slave Out (MISO/PF3)  
14.1.1  
The MISO line is configured as an input in a master device and as an output in a slave  
device. It is one of the two lines that transfer serial data in one direction, with the most  
significant bit sent first. The MISO line of a slave device is placed in the high-impedance  
state if the slave is not selected.  
14.1.2  
Master Out Slave In (MOSI/PF2)  
The MOSI line is configured as an output in a master device and as an input in a slave  
device. It is one of the two lines that transfer serial data in one direction with the most  
significant bit sent first.  
14.1.3  
Serial Clock (SCK/PF1)  
The master clock is used to synchronize data movement both in and out of the device  
through its MOSI and MISO lines. The master and slave devices are capable of exchanging  
a byte of information during a sequence of eight clock cycles. Since SCK is generated by  
the master device, this line becomes an input on a slave device.  
As shown in Figure 14-1, four possible timing relationships may be chosen by using control  
bits CPOL and CPHA in the serial peripheral control register (SPCR). Both master and  
slave devices must operate with the same timing. The master device always places data  
on the MOSI line a half-cycle before the clock edge (SCK), in order for the slave device to  
latch the data.  
Two bits (SPR0 and SPR1) in the SPCR of the master device select the clock rate. In a  
slave device, SPR0 and SPR1 have no effect on the operation of the SPI.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 84  
SECTION 14: SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
14.1.4  
Slave Select (SS/PF0)  
The slave select (SS) input line is used to select a slave device. It has to be low prior to  
data transactions and must stay low for the duration of the transaction.The SS line on the  
master must be tied high. If it goes low, a mode fault error flag (MODF) is set in the SPSR.  
When CPHA=0, the shift clock is the OR of SS with SCK. In this clock phase mode, SS  
must go high between successive characters in an SPI message. When CPHA=1, SS may  
be left low for several SPI characters. In cases where there is only one SPI slave MCU, its  
SS line could be tied to V as long as CPHA=1 clock modes are used. The SS pin is  
SS  
shared with the PF0 pin. See 9.4PORT F for additional information on the SS pin.  
14.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION  
Figure 14-2 shows a block diagram of the serial peripheral interface circuitry. When a  
master device transmits data to a slave via the MOSI line, the slave device responds by  
sending data to the master device via the master’s MISO line. This implies full duplex  
transmission with both data out and data in synchronized with the same clock signal. Thus,  
the byte transmitted is replaced by the byte received and eliminates the need for separate  
transmit-empty and receive-full status bits. A single status bit (SPIF) is used to signify that  
the I/O operation has been completed.  
The SPI is double buffered on read, but not on write. If a write is performed during data  
transfer, the transfer occurs uninterrupted, and the write will be unsuccessful. This  
condition will cause the write collision (WCOL) status bit in the SPSR to be set. After a data  
byte is shifted, the SPIF flag of the SPSR is set.  
SECTION 14: SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE  
MOTOROLA  
Page 85  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
S
M
PF3/  
MISO  
INTERNAL  
MCU CLOCK  
MSB  
LSB  
M
S
PF2/  
MOSI  
8-BIT SHIFT REG  
DIVIDER  
READ DATA BUFF  
÷2  
÷4 ÷16 ÷32  
CLOCK  
SPI CLOCK (MASTER)  
S
SELECT  
CLOCK  
LOGIC  
PF1/  
SCK  
M
PF0/  
SS  
MSTR  
SPE  
SPI CONTROL  
SPI STATUS REGISTER  
SPI CONTROL REGISTER  
SPI INTERRUPT  
REQUEST  
INTERNAL  
DATA BUS  
Figure 14-2: Serial Peripheral Interface Block Diagram  
In the master mode, the SCK pin is an output. It idles high or low, depending on the CPOL  
bit in the SPCR, until data is written to the shift register, at which point eight clocks are  
generated to shift the eight bits of data and then SCK goes idle again.  
In a slave mode, the slave select start logic receives a logic low at the SS pin and a clock  
at the SCK pin. Thus, the slave is synchronized with the master. Data from the master is  
received serially at the MOSI line and loads the 8-bit shift register. After the 8-bit shift  
register is loaded, its data is parallel transferred to the read buffer. During a write cycle, data  
is written into the shift register, then the slave waits for a clock train from the master to shift  
the data out on the slave’s MISO line.  
Figure 14-3 illustrates the MOSI, MISO, SCK, and SS master-slave interconnections.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 86  
SECTION 14: SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
MASTER  
SLAVE  
MISO  
MOSI  
MISO  
MOSI  
8-BIT SHIFT REGISTER  
8-BIT SHIFT REGISTER  
SPI CLOCK  
GENERATOR  
SCK  
SS  
SCK  
SS  
V
DD  
Figure 14-3: Serial Peripheral Interface Master-Slave Interconnection  
14.3 SPI REGISTERS  
There are three registers in the SPI which provide control, status, and data storage  
functions. These registers are called the serial control register (SPCR), serial peripheral  
status register (SPSR), and serial peripheral data I/O register (SPDR) and are described in  
the following paragraphs.  
14.3.1  
Serial Peripheral Control Register (SPCR)  
$0A  
SPIE  
0
SPE  
0
0
MSTR  
0
CPOL  
0
CPHA  
1
SPR1  
U
SPR0  
U
RESET:  
Figure 14-4: SPI Control Register (SPCR)  
SPIE - Serial Peripheral Interrupt Enable  
0 = SPIF interrupts disabled  
1 = SPI interrupt is SPIF=1  
SPE - Serial Peripheral System Enable  
0 = SPI system off  
1 = SPI system on. Port F becomes SPI pins. SS is a special case. See 9.4  
PORT F for additional information.  
MSTR - Master Mode Select  
0 = Slave mode  
1 = Master mode  
SECTION 14: SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE  
MOTOROLA  
Page 87  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
CPOL - Clock Polarity  
When the clock polarity bit is cleared and data is not being transferred, a steady  
state low value is produced at the SCK pin of the master device. Conversely, if  
this bit is set, the SCK pin will idle high. This bit is also used in conjunction with  
the clock phase control bit to produce the desired clock-data relationship  
between master and slave. Figure 14-1: Data Clock Timing Diagram.  
CPHA - Clock Phase  
The clock phase bit, in conjunction with the CPOL bit, controls the clock-data  
relationship between master and slave. The CPOL bit can be thought of as  
simply inserting an inverter in series with the SCK line. The CPHA bit selects one  
of two fundamentally different clocking protocols. When CPHA=0, the shift clock  
is the OR of SCK with SS. As soon as SS goes low, the transaction begins and  
the first edge on SCK invokes the first data sample. When CPHA=1, the SS pin  
may be thought of as a simple output enable control. Figure 14-1: Data Clock  
Timing Diagram.  
SPR1 and SPR0 - SPI Clock Rate Selects  
These two bits select one of four baud rates (Figure 14-5) to be used as SCK if  
the device is a master; however, they have no effect in the slave mode.  
INT MCU CLOCK  
DIVIDED BY  
SPR1  
SPR0  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
2
4
16  
32  
Figure 14-5: Serial Peripheral Rate Selection  
Serial Peripheral Status Register (SPSR)  
14.3.2  
$0B  
SPIF  
0
WCOL  
0
0
MODF  
0
0
0
0
0
RESET:  
Figure 14-6: SPI Status Register (SPSR)  
SPIF - SPI Transfer Complete Flag  
The serial peripheral data transfer flag bit is set upon completion of data transfer  
between the processor and external device. If SPIF goes high, and if SPIE is set,  
a serial peripheral interrupt is generated. Clearing the SPIF bit is accomplished  
by reading the SPSR (with SPIF set) followed by an access of the SPDR. Unless  
SPSR is read (with SPIF set) first, attempts to write to SPDR are inhibited.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 88  
SECTION 14: SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
WCOL - Write Collision  
The write collision bit is set when an attempt is made to write to the serial  
peripheral data register while data transfer is taking place. If CPHA is zero, a  
transfer is said to begin when SS goes low and the transfer ends when SS goes  
high after eight clock cycles on SCK. When CPHA is one, a transfer is said to  
begin the first time SCK becomes active while SS is low and the transfer ends  
when the SPIF flag gets set. Clearing the WCOL bit is accomplished by reading  
the SPSR (with WCOL set) followed by an access to SPDR.  
Bit 5 - Not implemented  
This bit always reads zero.  
MODF - Mode Fault  
The mode fault flag indicates that there may have been a multi-master conflict  
for system control and allows a proper exit from system operation to a reset or  
default system state. The MODF bit is normally clear, and is set only when the  
master device has its SS pin pulled low. Setting the MODF bit affects the internal  
serial peripheral interface system in the following ways:  
• SPI interrupt is generated if SPIE=1.  
• SPE bit is cleared. This disables the SPI.  
• MSTR bit is cleared, thus forcing the device into the slave mode.  
Clearing the MODF bit is accomplished by reading the SPSR (with MODF set),  
followed by a write to the SPCR. Control bits SPE and MSTR may be restored  
to their original state by user software after the MODF bit has been cleared. It is  
also necessary to restore DDRD after a mode fault.  
Bits 3-0 - Not Implemented  
These bits always read zero.  
14.3.3  
Serial Peripheral Data I/O Register (SPDR)  
$0C  
SPD7  
-
SPD6  
-
SPD5  
-
SPD4  
-
SPD3  
-
SPD2  
-
PSD1  
-
SPD0  
-
RESET:  
The serial peripheral data I/O register is used to transmit and receive data on the serial bus.  
Only a write to this register will initiate transmission/reception of another byte, and this will  
only occur in the master device. At the completion of transmitting a byte of data, the SPIF  
status bit is set in both the master and slave devices.  
When the user reads the serial peripheral data I/O register, a buffer is actually being read.  
The first SPIF must be cleared by the time a second transfer of the data from the shift  
register to the read buffer is initiated, or an overrun condition will exist. In cases of overrun,  
the byte that causes the overrun is lost.  
A write to the serial peripheral data I/O register is not buffered and places data directly into  
the shift register for transmission.  
SECTION 14: SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE  
MOTOROLA  
Page 89  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
14.4 SPI IN STOP MODE  
When the MCU enters the STOP mode, the baud rate generator which drives the SPI shuts  
down. This essentially stops all master mode SPI operation; thus, the master SPI is unable  
to transmit or receive any data. If the STOP instruction is executed during an SPI transfer,  
that transfer is halted until the MCU exits the stop mode (provided it is an exit resulting from  
a viable interrupt source). If the stop mode is exited by a reset, then the appropriate control/  
status bits are cleared and the SPI is disabled. If the device is in the slave mode when the  
STOP instruction is executed, the slave SPI will still operate. It can still accept data and clock  
information in addition to transmitting its own data back to a master device.  
At the end of a possible transmission with a slave SPI in the stop mode, no flags are set until  
a viable interrupt results in an MCU "wake up". Caution should be observed when operating  
the SPI (as a slave) during the stop mode because none of the protection circuitry (write  
collision, mode fault, etc.) is active.  
It should also be noted that when the MCU enters the stop mode all enabled output drivers  
(MISO, MOSI, and SCLK ports) remain active and any sourcing currents from these outputs  
will be part of the total supply current required by the device.  
14.5 SPI IN WAIT MODE  
The SPI subsystem remains active in wait mode. Therefore, it is consuming power. If it is  
desired to reduce power, the SPI should be shut off prior to entering wait mode. A non-  
resetexit from wait mode will result in the state of the SPI being unchanged. A reset exit will  
return the SPI to its reset state, which is disabled.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 90  
SECTION 14: SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 15  
MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
The Message Data Link Controller (MDLC) provides access to an external serial  
communication multiplex bus, operating according to the SAE J1850 protocol.  
Key features of the MDLC include:  
• SAE J1850 compatible  
• GM Class 2 compatible  
• 10.4 kbps variable pulse width (VPW) bit format  
• Digital noise filter  
• Collision detection  
• Two 11-byte Receive Buffers, one 11-byte Transmit Buffer  
• Hardware CRC generation and checking  
• Two power saving modes with automatic wake up on network activity  
• Polling and CPU interrupts available  
• Receive Block mode supported  
• Coexists with devices supporting 4x mode  
• Auto retry following loss of arbitration  
• In-frame Response not supported  
• Low Voltage Protection  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 91  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.1 OUTLINE  
To J1850 Bus  
Physical Interface  
MUX Interface  
Protocol Handler  
Rx/Tx  
Buffers  
CPU Interface  
MDLC  
To CPU  
The CPU Interface contains the software addressable registers and provides the link  
between the CPU and the Tx and Rx Buffers. The Tx and Rx Buffers provide storage for  
data received and data to be transmitted onto the J1850 bus. The Protocol Handler is  
responsible for the encoding and decoding of data bits and special message symbols  
during transmission and reception. The MUX Interface provides the link between the MDLC  
digital section and the analog Physical Interface. The wave shaping, driving, and digitizing  
of data is performed by the Physical Interface.  
NOTE: The bus data rate depends upon the microcontroller oscillator frequency  
(fOSC) and the MDLC rate selection control bits (R0, R1). The correct  
combination for the application must be chosen in order for J1850 bus  
communications to take place. See 15.2.2.3 R1, R0 - Rate Select.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 92  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.1.1  
MDLC OPERATING MODES  
The MDLC has five main modes of operation that interact with the power supplies, pins, the  
and rest of the MCU as shown below.  
Power Off  
V
> V  
(Min.) and  
DD  
mdlc  
V
V  
(Min.)  
DD  
mdlc  
Any MCU reset source asserted  
Reset  
Any MCU reset source asserted  
(from any mode)  
(COP, ILLADDR, P.U., RESET, LVR, POR  
DISABLED STOP)  
No MCU reset source asserted  
Run  
Network activity or  
other MCU wake-up  
RXMS=1 or  
other MCU wake-up  
MDLC Stop  
MDLC Wait  
STOP instruction or  
(WAIT instruction and WCM=1)  
(WAIT instruction and WCM=0)  
Figure 15-1: MDLC Operating Modes State Diagram  
15.1.2  
15.1.2.1  
MODE DESCRIPTIONS  
Power Off  
This mode is entered from the Reset mode whenever the MCU supply voltage V drops  
DD  
below the minimum specified value to guarantee correct MDLC operation. In order to  
ensure that the MDLC does not enter an unknown state, it will first be placed in the Reset  
mode before being powered down. In this mode, the pin input and output specifications are  
not guaranteed.  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 93  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.1.2.2  
Reset  
This mode is entered from the Power Off mode whenever the MCU supply voltage V  
DD  
rises above the minimum specified value and some MCU reset source is asserted. In order  
to prevent an unknown state from being entered and to guarantee correct operation, the  
internal MCU reset will be asserted while the MDLC module is being powered up.  
This mode is entered from any other mode whenever the MCU supply voltage V drops  
DD  
below the minimum value for correct MDLC operation. When this occurs, the MDLC module  
will reenter the Reset mode before being powered down to prevent an unknown state from  
being entered.  
The Reset mode is also entered from any other mode as soon as one of the MCU’s possible  
reset sources (for example, POR, COP watchdog, Reset pin etc.) is asserted.  
In this mode, the internal MDLC voltage references are operative, V is supplied to the  
DD  
internal circuits, which are held in their reset state and the internal MDLC system clock is  
running. Registers will assume their reset condition. Outputs are held in their programmed  
reset state, inputs and network activity are ignored.  
15.1.2.3  
Run  
This mode is entered from the Reset mode after all MCU reset sources are no longer  
asserted. It is entered from the MDLC Wait mode whenever a message is successfully  
received.  
It is entered from the MDLC Stop mode whenever network activity is sensed though  
messages will not be received properly until the clocks have stabilized and the CPU is also  
in the Run mode.  
In this mode, normal network operation takes place. The user should ensure that all MDLC  
transmissions have ceased before exiting this mode.  
15.1.2.4  
MDLC Wait  
This power conserving mode is automatically entered from the Run mode whenever the  
CPU executes a WAIT instruction and if the WCM bit in the MCR register is previously  
cleared.  
In this mode, the MDLC internal clocks continue to run but the physical interface circuitry is  
placed in a low power mode and awaits a valid network message. If a valid network  
message is successfully received (RXMS=1) a CPU interrupt request will be generated.  
15.1.2.5  
MDLC Stop  
This power conserving mode is automatically entered from the Run mode whenever the  
CPU executes a STOP instruction, or if the CPU executes a WAIT instruction and the WCM  
bit in the MCR register is previously set.  
In this mode, the MDLC internal clocks are stopped but the physical interface circuitry is  
placed in a low power mode and awaits network activity. If network activity is sensed, then  
a CPU interrupt request will be generated, restarting the MDLC internal clocks.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 94  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.2 MDLC CPU INTERFACE  
15.2.1  
OUTLINE  
The CPU Interface provides the interface between the CPU and the MDLC. It consists of 4  
user registers. A full description of each register follows:  
To J1850 Bus  
Physical Interface  
MUX Interface  
Protocol Handler  
Rx/Tx  
Buffers  
CPU Interface  
MDLC  
To CPU  
Addr  
Name  
$000E  
$000F  
$0010  
$0011  
MCR  
MSR  
MTCR  
MRSR  
Figure 15-2: MDLC User Registers  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 95  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.2.2  
MDLC CONTROL REGISTER (MCR) $0E  
This register is used to configure and control the MDLC.  
Bit 7  
RXBM  
0
Bit 6  
TXAB  
0
Bit 5  
R1  
1
Bit 4  
R0  
0
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
WCM  
0
-
-
IE  
RESET  
0
0
0
Figure 15-3: MDLC Control Register (MCR)  
All bits may be read in all modes of MCU operation.  
Bits 0, 4 and 5 may be written to only once after reset after which they become read only  
bits.  
Bit 1 may always be written.  
Bits 6 and 7 may only be set by the CPU, clears are ignored. These bits are cleared  
automatically by the MDLC when the appropriate action is completed.  
15.2.2.1  
RXBM - Receive Block Mode  
This bit is set to indicate to the MDLC that the next incoming message will be a block  
message. (See 15.7.4 RECEIVING A MESSAGE IN BLOCK MODE).  
If this bit is set and the Rx Buffer being loaded with data bytes received from the multiplex  
bus is filled or the last byte of the current block message has been received, a CPU  
interrupt request is generated (if the IE bit is set) and the Rx Message Successful (RXMS)  
bit will be set, just as in normal message reception. Additional incoming bytes will be placed  
into the next available Rx Buffer.  
The RC3-0 bits of the MRSR register only reflect the byte count of the Rx Buffer available  
to the CPU and not a cumulative value of the number of bytes in the block message.  
Once set, this bit can only be cleared automatically by the MDLC. It will be cleared following  
the successful reception of a message or immediately upon the receiver detecting an error  
(CRC, invalid bit etc.), reverting the MDLC to its usual mode of operation in which normal  
message lengths are expected. This bit will also be cleared if both Rx Buffers fill, they are  
not serviced and further data bytes are received (Block mode ’overflow’ occurs).  
The receiver will compute a cumulative CRC throughout the reception of a block message,  
and will not treat the CRC calculation as complete until an End of Data (EOD) symbol is  
received. At this time the MDLC will automatically clear the RXBM bit indicating to the  
programmer that the block message has ended.  
15.2.2.2  
TXAB - Transmit Abort  
This bit is set by the programmer to abort an in-progress transmission. The subsequent  
actions depend upon what the transmitter is doing at the point in time when the CPU  
interface recognizes this command.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 96  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
If this command is recognized by the MDLC while one of the first seven bits of a byte is  
being transmitted (non-byte boundary) then the transmission of the bit will be completed  
and no further bits will be sent.  
If this command is recognized while the last bit of a byte is being transmitted (byte  
boundary) then the transmission of the bit will first be completed. In order to avoid receiving  
nodes from interpreting the aborted transmission at a byte boundary as being the end of a  
normal message, the MDLC will then send two extra logic one bits.  
This guarantees that no aborted message will be an integral number of bytes in length and  
cannot be mistaken for a valid transmission.  
Arbitration will be performed on any extra bits sent, allowing any other nodes which are also  
transmitting to continue. Should the MDLC lose arbitration during the first extra logic one  
sent, the second extra logic one will not be sent and no further attempts to send the  
message will be made.  
If this command is recognized after a write to the MDLC Transmit Control Register (MTCR),  
thus initiating a transmission, but before the message has begun to be sent on the J1850  
bus, then no attempt to transmit that message will be made until a subsequent write to the  
MTCR is made.  
If this command is recognized between automatic transmission retry attempts, such as  
those following a loss of arbitration, all further attempts to resend the message will be  
suppressed.  
This bit is automatically cleared after the abort takes place or after it is determined that the  
MDLC was not transmitting anyway. Refer to Table 15-1: MDLC Transmit Abort  
Function Summary for a summary of the operation of the TXAB bit.  
The programmer must never write to the MTCR register while the TXAB bit is set, as this  
may have unpredictable results.  
Table 15-1: MDLC Transmit Abort Function Summary  
Transmit Abort Command  
MDLC Action  
Command recognized on  
non-byte boundary  
MDLC will terminate transmission immediately  
Command recognized on  
byte boundary  
MDLC will transmit up to two extra ones  
MDLC will not transmit the message  
Command recognized  
before the message has  
started on the J1850 bus  
Command recognized  
during retry  
MDLC will not retry to transmit the message  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 97  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.2.2.3  
These bits determine the operating frequency of the MDLC.  
The nominal frequency (f ) of the MUX Interface clock must always be 1.048576 MHz  
R1, R0 - Rate Select  
mdlc  
in order for J1850 bus communication to take place. Therefore, the value programmed into  
these bits is dependant upon the chosen MCU system clock frequency per the following  
table.  
Table 15-2: MDLC Rate Selection  
Clock Frequency  
R1  
R0  
Division  
fMDLC  
fOSC =1.048576 MHz  
(fOP=524Khz)  
0
0
1
1.048576 MHz  
fOP=1.048576 MHz  
fOP=2.097152 MHz  
fOP=4.194304 MHz  
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
2
4
1.048576 MHz  
1.048576 MHz  
1.048576 MHz  
In the case of R1=R0=0, the oscillator clock is used instead of E clock.  
The case of R1=R0=1 must not be selected for the MC68HC05V7 and MC68HC705V8.  
15.2.2.4  
IE - Interrupt Enable  
This bit determines whether the MDLC will generate CPU interrupt requests in the Run  
mode. Clearing the IE bit will not prevent CPU interrupt requests when exiting the MDLC  
Stop or MDLC Wait modes.  
When set, the MDLC will generate CPU interrupt requests. Interrupt requests will be  
maintained until all of the interrupt request sources are cleared, by performing the specified  
actions upon the MDLC registers.  
When clear, the MDLC will not generate CPU interrupt requests. Interrupts that were  
pending at the time that this bit is cleared may be lost.  
15.2.2.5  
WCM - Wait Clock Mode  
This bit determines the operation of the MDLC during CPU Wait mode. See 15.7.6 MDLC  
WAIT MODE for more details on its use.  
When set, the MDLC internal operating clocks will be stopped during CPU Wait mode.  
When clear, the MDLC internal operating clocks will stay running during CPU Wait mode.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 98  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.2.3  
MDLC STATUS REGISTER (MSR) $0F  
This register indicates the transmit and receive status of the MDLC.  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
TXMS  
0
Bit 2  
RXMS  
0
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
RESET  
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 15-4: MDLC Status Register (MSR)  
All bits may be read in all modes of MCU operation.  
Bits 0,1, 4, 5, 6, and 7 will always read as zeros and can never be written to.  
Bits 2 and 3 are reflective of CPU interrupt request signals and are asserted as long as their  
respective CPU interrupt request is pending. Neither bit is affected by CPU interrupt  
requests generated when the MDLC ’wakes up’ from MDLC Stop or MDLC Wait mode.  
All writes to this register are ignored in all modes of MCU operation.  
15.2.3.1  
TXMS - Transmitted Message Successfully  
When set this bit indicates that the Tx Buffer contents have been sent successfully.  
An access of the Tx Control Register (MTCR) will clear this bit.  
15.2.3.2  
RXMS - Received Message Successfully  
When set, this bit indicates that one of the Rx Buffers contains a new message.  
This bit can only be cleared if both Rx Buffers are empty. If only one message has been  
received into an Rx Buffer by the MDLC, any access (read or write) of the MDLC Rx Status  
Register (MRSR) will clear the RXMS bit.  
If a second message is received after the RXMS bit has been cleared by the CPU as it is  
retrieving the first message, the RXMS bit will immediately be set again, and will remain set  
until the MRSR is accessed once the last message received is made available to the CPU.  
If both Rx Buffers contain a received message, the RXMS bit will simply remain set until the  
MRSR register is accessed once the last message received is made available to the CPU.  
15.2.3.3  
TXMS and RXMS Interrupts  
If either the TXMS or the RXMS bit is set, and if interrupts are enabled, an interrupt request  
will be made to the CPU. The interrupt service routine may poll these bits to establish the  
cause of the interrupt. The mechanism for clearing each of these bits will also clear the  
associated CPU interrupt request.  
Alternatively, if interrupts are disabled, the CPU may poll these bits periodically to see if a  
change in status has occurred.  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 99  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
The MDLC will attempt to receive every message that it sends, so the RXMS bit will usually  
be set a short time after the TXMS bit is set.  
Because these bits act independently, cannot be written to, and have separate clearing  
mechanisms, it is not possible to inadvertently miss an interrupt.  
15.2.3.4  
Clearing Wake Up Interrupts  
Although no flag bit is affected by the MDLC waking up from MDLC Stop Mode (entered by  
’STOP’ or ’WAIT’ with WCM bit set previously) due to network activity, the CPU interrupt  
request that is generated by the wake up is cleared by an access of the MRSR register.  
15.2.4  
MDLC TX CONTROL REGISTER (MTCR) $10  
This register controls the operation of the MDLC transmitter, including the Tx Buffer.  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
TC3  
0
Bit 2  
TC2  
0
Bit 1  
TC1  
0
Bit 0  
TC0  
0
0
0
0
0
RESET  
0
0
0
0
Figure 15-5: MDLC Tx Control Register (MTCR)  
All bits may be read in all modes of MCU operation.  
Bits 4, 5, 6, and 7 will always read as zeros and can never be written to.  
Bits 0, 1, 2, and 3 can be written to in all modes of MCU operation.  
15.2.4.1  
TC0,1,2,3 - Transmit Count  
These bits determine the length of the message body (not including the CRC byte) to be  
sent. Internally, they are reset to $00 following a reset.  
The programmer should first determine that the MDLC is ready to transmit, then load the  
message header and data bytes into the Tx Buffer, and finally write the length of the body  
of the message (excluding CRC byte) into this register.  
This will cause the MDLC to initiate transmission of the contents of the Tx Buffer according  
to the J1850 protocol. Once the last byte has been sent, a Cyclic Redundancy Check  
(CRC) byte will automatically be appended to the end of the message body.  
Once the CRC has been successfully sent, a CPU interrupt request will be generated (if the  
Interrupt Enable (IE) bit is set) and the Tx Message Successful (TXMS) bit will be set in the  
MSR register.  
An access of this register will clear the CPU interrupt request and the TXMS bit.  
The valid range of values that may be written to this register is $01 to $0B. Since the Tx  
Buffer is 11 bytes long, any value greater than or equal to $0C written to this register will  
create a Tx Buffer overflow error and cause the MDLC to not transmit that message.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 100  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
Attempts to send a zero byte message body length (value of $00 written to MTCR) will also  
prevent the MDLC from transmitting that message.  
Writing a value within the valid range to this register will initiate a transmission regardless  
of whether any new data has been loaded into the Tx Buffer. Failure to supply new data  
before this register is written to will result in the MDLC transmitting whatever data happens  
to be in the Tx Buffer at the time of the write.  
Do not write to this register while the TXAB bit in the MCR register is set.  
This register will be automatically cleared at the end of any transmission, whether it was  
successful, unsuccessful or aborted.  
15.2.5  
MDLC RX STATUS REGISTER (MRSR) $11  
This register reports the status of the MDLC receiver, including the Rx Buffer.  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
0
0
0
0
RC3  
RC2  
RC1  
RC0  
RESET  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 15-6: MDLC Rx Status Register (MRSR)  
All bits may be read in all modes of MCU operation.  
Bits 4, 5, 6, and 7 will always read as zeros and can never be written to.  
Bits 0, 1, 2, and 3 can be written to in all modes of MCU operation.  
15.2.5.1  
RC0,1,2,3 - Receive Count  
These bits reflect the number of bytes of the message body in the Rx Buffer available to  
the CPU. As a message is being received, the data is placed into successive locations of  
one of the two Rx Buffers. The Rx Buffer being filled is not visible to the programmer.  
A running count of the number of bytes received is kept internally. The maximum count is  
11 bytes. The CRC is not placed in the Rx Buffer and is not counted in the final indicated  
message length.  
Once the message has been received error-free, the Rx Buffer is placed into the MCU’s  
memory map, the MRSR is updated with the count of the number of data bytes received, a  
CPU interrupt request is generated if the Interrupt Enable (IE) bit is set and the Rx Message  
Successful (RXMS) bit will be set in the MSR.  
When the programmer has finished analyzing the received message, a write to this register  
will signal to the MDLC that the programmer no longer needs the contents of the Rx Buffer.  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 101  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
The Rx Buffer will then be released back to the MDLC. If another message is available in  
the second Rx Buffer at this time, the new message will then be made available to the CPU.  
Following a write to the MRSR to release the Rx Buffer, this register should not be  
accessed again until the RXMS bit is again verified to be set. This procedure will ensure  
that the MRSR value does not change while it is being accessed by the CPU.  
If, while performing the above operations, another message begins to arrive then the  
second message will be placed in a duplicate Rx Buffer. The MDLC will always present the  
oldest available message to the programmer, therefore only one Rx Buffer appears in the  
memory map while the other one is filled with a newer message.  
If both Rx Buffers are filled when a third new message arrives, the third message will be  
ignored and the prior messages within the Rx Buffers will not be affected.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 102  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.3 MDLC Rx/Tx BUFFERS  
The Rx and Tx Buffers provide the interface between the CPU Interface and the Protocol  
Handler. They provide buffering of data being sent and received, reducing the frequency of  
interrupts to the CPU. Please refer to the MCU memory map for details on the starting and  
ending addresses of these buffers within the overall memory map.  
To J1850 Bus  
Physical Interface  
MUX Interface  
Protocol Handler  
Rx/Tx  
Buffers  
CPU Interface  
MDLC  
To CPU  
15.3.1  
OUTLINE  
During all modes of MCU operation, the Rx and Tx Buffers are mapped as registers.  
Memory mapping these buffers requires the MDLC to supply the user with a count of the  
number of bytes in each received message and allows the user to tell the MDLC the length  
of a message to be transmitted.  
Access arbitration is simplified by the following rules:  
• The user must not read the Rx Buffer until the MDLC signals that an entire  
message has been received (Receive Message Successful bit (RXMS) in  
the MDLC Status Register (MSR) is set).  
• The user returns the Rx Buffer resource to the MDLC by writing any value  
to the MDLC Receive Status Register (MRSR).  
• The user must not write to the Tx Buffer after the MDLC has been told to  
transmit the message (length of message has been written to the MDLC  
Transmit Control Register (MTCR)).  
• The user must wait until the MDLC has sent the message (indicated by a  
CPU interrupt request and the Transmit Message Successful (TXMS) bit  
being set), or the message has been aborted (Transmit Abort bit (TXAB)  
in the MDLC Control Register (MCR) is toggled) before reloading the Tx  
Buffer.  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 103  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
The MDLC has three 11 byte buffer arrays. The transmit circuitry uses a single Tx Buffer,  
that for certain periods of time may have either the CPU or the MDLC access "locked out".  
The receiver has two Rx Buffers but only one can appear in the MCU memory map at a  
time. The CPU will have access to whichever Rx Buffer was filled the earliest. While the  
CPU is reading data from one Rx Buffer, the MDLC may place incoming data into the other  
Rx Buffer. When the CPU writes to the MRSR register, the Rx Buffer which the CPU had  
access to is "given back" to the MDLC making it available for another incoming message.  
The MDLC Tx Buffer is writable by the CPU at all times but it is not readable. A read of the  
Tx buffer will result in an unknown value. The Rx Buffers can be read by the CPU at  
anytime. However, writes to the Rx Buffer will not have an effect on the buffer’s content.  
NOTE: The contents of the Tx Buffer are not guaranteed to remain intact following  
a transmission so the Tx Buffer should be completely reloaded for each  
new message to be sent.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 104  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
Indicates active path  
MRSR  
Rx Buffer  
Array  
#1  
11 bytes  
MDLC  
Rx Logic  
To  
CPU  
MUX  
MUX  
MRSR  
Rx Buffer  
Array  
#2  
Write to MRSR  
"gives back" buffer  
to MDLC for Rx.  
MDLC automatically  
toggles multiplexer (MUX)  
11 bytes  
when one buffer is full.  
MTCR  
Tx Buffer  
Array  
MDLC  
Tx Logic  
From  
CPU  
Write to MTCR  
"gives back" buffer  
to MDLC for Tx.  
11 bytes  
Figure 15-7: MDLC Rx/Tx Buffers Outline  
15.3.2  
RX BUFFERS  
The Rx Buffers consist of two 11-byte arrays, with 8 bits per byte. Only one message may  
occupy each Rx Buffer array at any time. Each Rx Buffer array has an internal register (the  
’Rx Buffer pointer’) associated with it in which the length of the message body is recorded.  
Following a reset, the MDLC has "possession" of the two empty Rx Buffers and their  
associated Rx Buffer pointers are both reset to zero. Neither Rx Buffer appears in the CPU  
memory map at this time, attempts to read them will return undefined data.  
As each data byte of an incoming message is received by the MDLC, it is placed into the  
next available entry of one of the Rx Buffers and the Rx Buffer pointer is incremented. This  
continues until the end of the message is detected or an error occurs.  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 105  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
If the received message is verified as error-free then the CRC is discarded, the filled Rx  
Buffer and the final value of the Rx Buffer pointer are placed into the CPU memory map,  
the Received Message Successfully (RXMS) bit in the MDLC Status Register (MSR) is set,  
a CPU interrupt request is made (if interrupts are enabled) and the other Rx Buffer and its  
pointer are readied for reception of the next message by the MDLC.  
The CPU may now randomly read the Rx Buffer. The first data byte received will be located  
in the lowest address entry of the Rx Buffer. The rest of the message is located in  
contiguous ascending address entries up to the last data byte received, which will be  
located in the nth entry, where ’n’ is the final value of the Rx Buffer pointer which now  
appears in the MDLC Rx Status Register (MRSR).  
As long as the CPU has possession of this Rx Buffer, the MDLC will have possession of  
the other Rx Buffer and can concurrently receive a second message without conflict with,  
or intervention by, the CPU. Once the CPU has finished with the contents of the Rx Buffer,  
it may be "given back" to the MDLC by writing any value to the MRSR register.  
The above sequence is then repeated as long as normal data reception takes place.  
If the CPU is unable to return an Rx Buffer and the second Rx Buffer becomes filled and a  
further new message arrives from the J1850 bus then the new message will be ignored by  
the MDLC until an Rx Buffer becomes available to receive new data.  
If any type of reception error is detected by the MDLC as a message is being received from  
the J1850 bus, the internal Rx Buffer pointer will be reset to zero, effectively flushing the  
data received so far, and the MDLC will ignore the rest of the message. When this occurs  
the MDLC will not generate a CPU interrupt request and will silently wait for the next valid  
SOF symbol.  
This will also happen if a message received from the J1850 bus is longer than 12 bytes  
(including CRC byte), and the Receive Block mode (RXBM) bit is not set. In both cases,  
when the internal Rx Buffer pointer is reset to zero, the associated Rx Buffer array bytes  
will not be cleared or changed.  
If a message received from the J1850 bus is longer than 12 bytes (including CRC byte),  
and the Receive Block mode (RXBM) bit is set then reception of the message will be  
continued into the next available Rx Buffer. This will repeat until the end of the message is  
detected, at which time the residual data bytes will remain in the last Rx Buffer to be filled.  
15.3.3  
TX BUFFER  
The Tx Buffer consists of one 11-byte array, with 8 bits per byte. Only one message may  
occupy the Tx Buffer at any time. The Tx Buffer array has an internal register (the ’Tx Buffer  
pointer’) associated with it in which the length of the message body is stored.  
Following a reset, the CPU has "possession" of the empty Tx Buffer and its associated Tx  
Buffer pointer is reset to zero. The Tx Buffer appears in the CPU memory map at this time,  
where the CPU may randomly access it. The first data byte of the message to be sent must  
be placed in the lowest address entry of the Tx Buffer. The rest of the message must be  
placed in contiguous ascending address entries up to the last data byte to be sent, which  
is located in the nth entry, where ’n’ is the length of the message body to be sent.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 106  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
As long as the CPU has possession of the Tx Buffer, the MDLC cannot transmit. Once the  
CPU has finished with the contents of the Tx Buffer, it may be "given back" to the MDLC by  
writing the message body length ’n’ to the MDLC Tx Control Register (MTCR).  
Starting from the first entry of the Tx Buffer, the MDLC fetches each data byte from a filled  
entry of the Tx Buffer, the Tx Buffer pointer is incremented and the MDLC attempts to  
transmit the data byte onto the J1850 bus. This continues until the last byte of the message  
body has been fetched, arbitration is lost or an error occurs. If the transmitted message is  
sent error-free then a CRC is appended, the filled Tx Buffer is given back to the CPU, the  
Transmitted Message Successfully (TXMS) bit in the MDLC Status Register (MSR) is set,  
and a CPU interrupt request is made (if interrupts are enabled). This sequence is then  
repeated as long as normal data transmission takes place.  
If any type of transmission error is detected by the MDLC as a message is being transmitted  
onto the J1850 bus, the internal Tx Buffer pointer will be reset to zero, effectively flushing  
the data to be sent, and the MDLC will automatically abort transmission. When this occurs  
the MDLC will not generate a CPU interrupt request and will silently wait for the next write  
to the MTCR register.  
If a loss of arbitration occurs while the MDLC is attempting to transmit a message, the  
MDLC will immediately halt transmission and become a receiver. As soon as an idle bus  
condition is detected, the MDLC will again attempt to transmit the message onto the  
multiplex bus. This automatic retry will continue until the message is transmitted  
successfully, an error is detected during transmission, or the TXAB bit is set by the CPU.  
Since the Tx Buffer is 11 bytes long, any value greater than or equal to $0C written to the  
MTCR register will create a Tx Buffer overflow error and cause the MDLC to not transmit  
that message. Attempts to send a zero byte message body length (value of $00 written to  
MTCR) will also cause the MDLC to not transmit that message.  
At the end of a transmission, successful, unsuccessful or aborted, the MTCR register is  
automatically cleared. If interrupts are enabled, the programmer should not poll the MTCR  
register to detect this action since each access will clear the TXMS bit in the MSR register!  
Instead, since the MDLC receives every message that it sends, the programmer should  
check that each message that is attempted to be sent is received back within some  
acceptable amount of time before attempting to send another message. Failure to receive  
back a message that has been sent in a timely fashion might indicate that some network  
fault exists.  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 107  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.4 MDLC PROTOCOL HANDLER  
The Protocol Handler is responsible for framing, collision detection, arbitration, CRC  
generation/checking, and error detection. The Protocol Handler conforms to SAE J1850 -  
Class B Data Communications Network Interface.  
To J1850 Bus  
Physical Interface  
MUX Interface  
Protocol Handler  
Rx/Tx  
Buffers  
CPU Interface  
MDLC  
To CPU  
15.4.1  
OUTLINE  
The Protocol Handler contains three main blocks: the State Machine, Rx Shift Register and  
Tx Shift Register, as shown below. Each block will now be described in more detail.  
To MUX Interface  
State Machine  
Rx Shift Register  
Tx Shift Register  
8
8
To CPU Interface & Rx/Tx Buffers  
Figure 15-8: MDLC Protocol Handler Outline  
15.4.2  
Rx & Tx SHIFT REGISTERS  
The Rx Shift Register gathers received serial data bits from the J1850 bus and makes them  
available in parallel form to the Rx Buffer. The Tx Shift Register takes data, in parallel form,  
from the Tx Buffer and presents it serially to the State Machine so that it can be transmitted  
onto the J1850 bus.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 108  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.4.3  
STATE MACHINE  
All of the functions associated with performing the protocol are executed or controlled by  
the State Machine. The State Machine is responsible for framing, collision detection,  
arbitration, CRC generation/checking, and error detection. The following sections describe  
the MDLC’s actions in a variety of situations.  
15.4.3.1  
In-Frame Response  
The MDLC does not support the In-Frame Response (IFR) feature of J1850. If the MDLC  
receives an IFR, it will ignore the response (not placing it in an Rx Buffer) and wait for the  
End of Frame (EOF) symbol.  
15.4.3.2  
4x Speed Mode  
The MDLC can exist on the same J1850 bus as modules which use a special 4x mode of  
J1850 VPW operation. The MDLC treats 4x mode messages as noise and ignores them.  
The MDLC will wait for a valid SOF or BREAK at 10.4 kbps to resume normal operation.  
15.4.3.3  
Block Mode  
While the MDLC can only transmit a maximum of 12 bytes (including CRC byte) in a given  
message, it has the ability to receive a message of unlimited length. Like 4x mode, the  
programmer will have to determine from a received message that Block mode is to be  
enabled. The programmer then sets the “Receive Block Message” (RXBM) bit in the MDLC  
Control Register (MCR) to indicate to the MDLC that the following message will be longer  
than 12 bytes and not to treat it as a message over length error.  
15.4.3.4  
Arbitration  
Arbitration is performed by the MDLC simply by comparing the data being received from  
the J1850 bus with the data being transmitted. This is done by latching the data being  
transmitted into a comparator, where it is compared with the data being received from the  
J1850 bus. If a valid data bit is received which has a higher priority over what was  
transmitted (0 over 1), arbitration is then lost, and the transmitter stops transmitting until a  
valid EOF symbol is received from the J1850 bus. See 15.5.5 MESSAGE ARBITRATION  
for more information.  
If an invalid bit or a symbol in a non-byte boundary is detected, the transmitter will also stop  
transmitting.  
In VPW, an active signal will always dominate a passive one, and a shorter passive symbol  
will dominate a longer passive symbol. This ensures that a logic zero will dominate a logic  
one, and the message with the highest priority (lowest value) will win arbitration. See 15.5.5  
MESSAGE ARBITRATION for more details.  
15.4.3.5  
J1850 Bus Errors  
The MDLC detects several types of transmit and receive errors which can occur during the  
transmission of a message onto the J1850 bus.  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 109  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
If the MDLC is transmitting a message and the message received contains invalid bits, or  
framing symbols on non-byte boundaries, this constitutes a transmission error. When a  
transmission error is detected, the MDLC will immediately cease transmitting.  
If the MDLC is receiving a message and it detects an error during the message, the  
message is discarded. No message with an error contained in it is passed to the CPU and  
no error status information is available.  
15.4.3.5.1  
CRC Error  
A CRC error is detected when the data bytes and CRC byte of a received message are  
processed, and the CRC calculation result is not equal to $C4. The CRC code should  
detect any single and 2 bit errors, as well as all 8 bit burst errors, and almost all other types  
of errors.  
15.4.3.5.2  
Bit Format Error  
A Bit Format error is detected when an abnormal (invalid) bit is detected in a message  
being received from the J1850 bus. However, if the MDLC is transmitting when this  
happens, it will be treated as a loss of arbitration rather than a transmitter error and the  
automatic retry mechanism will apply.  
15.4.3.5.3  
Message Format Error  
A Message Format error is detected if an EOD or EOF symbol is detected on a non-byte  
boundary from the J1850 bus.  
15.4.3.5.4  
Bus Fault  
If a bus fault occurs, the response of the MDLC will depend upon the type of bus fault.  
If the bus is shorted to V , the MDLC will wait for the bus to fall to a passive state before  
batt  
it will attempt to transmit a message. As long as the short remains, the MDLC will never  
attempt to transmit a message onto the J1850 bus.  
If the bus is shorted to ground, the MDLC will see an idle bus, begin to transmit the  
message, and then detect a transmission error, since the short to ground would not allow  
the bus to be driven to the dominant state. The MDLC will abort that transmission and wait  
for the next CPU command to transmit.  
In any case, if the bus fault is temporary, as soon as the fault is cleared, the MDLC will  
resume normal operation. If the bus fault is permanent, it may result in permanent loss of  
communication on the J1850 bus.  
15.4.3.5.5  
Message Under Length Error  
Any message received by the MDLC must be at least two bytes long. Since the MDLC does  
not have message filtering, these two bytes could just be one data byte and a CRC byte.  
Any messages received with less than the minimum number of bytes will be discarded by  
the MDLC.  
15.4.3.5.6  
Message Over Length Error  
A Message Over Length error is detected when a message being received exceeds the  
maximum length allowed for a message on the J1850 bus. If the Receive Block mode  
(RXBM) bit is not set, the maximum received length from SOF to the EOD is 12 bytes  
MOTOROLA  
Page 110  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
including the CRC byte. Any messages received with more than the maximum number of  
bytes will be discarded by the MDLC.  
15.4.3.5.7  
Invalid Active Level  
If the MDLC transmits an active symbol but senses that the bus remains active longer than  
163 us, then the MDLC will stop transmitting. The MDLC will treat this invalid active level  
just like a received Break symbol. The MDLC will try to transmit the message again after  
an idle bus is detected.  
15.4.3.5.8  
BREAK - Break  
Any MDLC transmitting at the time a BREAK is detected will treat the BREAK as if a loss  
of arbitration had occurred, and halt transmission. The MDLC will then retry to transmit the  
message.  
If while receiving a message the MDLC detects a BREAK symbol, it will treat the BREAK  
as a reception error and clear the current Rx Buffer pointer.  
Table 15-3: MDLC J1850 Bus Error Summary  
Error Condition  
Bus short to V  
MDLC Function  
.
The MDLC will not transmit until the bus is idle.  
BATT  
Bus short to Gnd.  
The MDLC will try only once to send the message.  
No interrupt will be generated.  
MDLC transmits  
but The MDLC will abort transmission immediately. No  
receives invalid bits (noise). interrupt will be generated.  
MDLC receives invalid bit. The MDLC will reset the Rx Buffer pointer and wait  
for the next valid SOF. No interrupt will be generated.  
MDLC receives message The MDLC will reset the Rx Buffer pointer and wait  
framing error. for the next valid SOF. No interrupt will be generated.  
MDLC receives under length The MDLC will reset the Rx Buffer pointer and wait  
or over length message. for the next valid SOF. No interrupt will be generated.  
MDLC receives invalid CRC The MDLC will reset the Rx Buffer pointer and wait  
for the next valid SOF. No interrupt will be generated.  
MDLC receives BREAK The MDLC will reset the Rx Buffer pointer and wait  
symbol  
for the next valid SOF. No interrupt will be generated.  
MDLC sends an EOD but The MDLC will reset the Rx Buffer pointer and try to  
receives an active symbol. resend that message after an idle bus.  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 111  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.5 MDLC MUX INTERFACE  
The MUX Interface is responsible for bit encoding/decoding and digital noise filtering  
between the Protocol Handler and the Physical Interface.  
To J1850 Bus  
Physical Interface  
MUX Interface  
Protocol Handler  
Rx/Tx  
Buffers  
CPU Interface  
MDLC  
To CPU  
15.5.1  
Rx DIGITAL FILTER  
The Receiver section of the MDLC includes a digital low pass filter to remove narrow noise  
pulses from the incoming message. An outline of the digital filter is shown below.  
Input  
Sync  
Data  
Latch  
4-Bit Up/Down Counter  
Filtered  
Rx Data  
from  
Physical  
Interface  
(RxP)  
Rx Data Out  
d
q
up/down  
= 15  
= 0  
s
r
q
MUX Interface Clock  
Figure 15-9: MDLC Rx Digital Filter Block  
MOTOROLA  
Page 112  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.5.1.1  
Operation  
The clock for the digital filter is provided by the MUX Interface clock. At each positive edge  
of the clock signal, the current state of the Receiver Physical Interface (RxP) signal is  
sampled. The RxP signal state is used to determine whether the counter should increment  
or decrement at the next negative edge of the clock signal.  
The counter will increment if the input data sample is high but decrement if the input sample  
is low. The counter will thus progress up towards ’15’ if, on average, the RxP signal remains  
high or progress down towards ’0’ if, on average, the RxP signal remains low.  
When the counter eventually reaches the value ’15’, the digital filter decides that the  
condition of the RxP signal is at a stable logic level one and the Data Latch is set, causing  
the Filtered Rx Data signal to become a logic level one. Furthermore, the counter is  
prevented from overflowing and can only be decremented from this state.  
Alternatively, should the counter eventually reach the value ’0’, the digital filter decides that  
the condition of the RxP signal is at a stable logic level zero and the Data Latch is reset,  
causing the Filtered Rx Data signal to become a logic level zero. Furthermore, the counter  
is prevented from underflowing and can only be incremented from this state.  
The Data Latch will retain its value until the counter next reaches the opposite end point,  
signifying a definite transition of the RxP signal.  
15.5.1.2  
Performance  
The performance of the digital filter is best described in the time domain rather than the  
frequency domain.  
If the level of the RxP signal transitions, then there will be a delay before that transition  
appears at the Filtered Rx Data output signal. This delay will be between 15 and 16 clock  
periods, depending on where the transition occurs with respect to the sampling points. This  
’filter delay’ must be taken into account when performing message arbitration.  
For example, if the frequency of the MUX Interface clock (fMDLC) is 1.0486MHz, then the  
period (tMDLC) is 954ns and the maximum filter delay in the absence of noise will be  
15.259us.  
The effect of random noise on the RxP signal depends on the characteristics of the noise  
itself. Narrow noise pulses on the RxP signal will be completely ignored if they are shorter  
than the filter delay. This provides a degree of low pass filtering.  
If noise occurs during a symbol transition, the detection of that transition may be delayed  
by an amount equal to the length of the noise burst. This is just a reflection of the  
uncertainty of where the transition is truly occurring within the noise.  
Noise pulses that are wider than the filter delay, but narrower than the shortest allowable  
symbol length will be detected by the next stage of the MDLC’s receiver as an invalid  
symbol.  
Noise pulses that are longer than the shortest allowable symbol length will normally be  
detected as an invalid symbol or as invalid data when the frame’s CRC is checked.  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 113  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.5.2 J1850 FRAME FORMAT  
All messages transmitted on the J1850 bus are structured using the format:  
Optional  
E
I
F
S
O
Data  
Data  
Idle SOF  
Data  
CRC  
IFR  
EOF  
Idle  
0
1
n
D
Figure 15-10: J1850 Bus Message Format (VPW)  
Each message has a maximum length of 12 bytes (excluding SOF, EOD, NB and EOF).  
15.5.2.1 SOF - Start of Frame Symbol  
All messages transmitted onto the J1850 bus must begin with an SOF symbol. This  
indicates to any listeners on the J1850 bus the start of a new message transmission. The  
SOF symbol is not used in the CRC calculation.  
15.5.2.2  
Data - In Message Data Bytes  
The data bytes contained in the message include the message header bytes and any actual  
data being transmitted to the receiving node. The MDLC can be used to transmit messages  
using any of the three header formats outlined in the SAE J1850 document. However, the  
MDLC does not utilize the IFR, Header type or functional/physical addressing bits defined  
in the 1st byte of the 3-byte consolidated header message format. See SAE J1850 - Class  
B Data Communications Network Interface, for more information about 1- and 3-byte  
headers.  
Messages transmitted by the MDLC onto the J1850 bus must contain at least one data  
byte, and therefore can be as short as one data byte and one CRC byte. Each data byte in  
the message is 8 bits in length, transmitted MSB to LSB.  
15.5.2.3  
CRC - Cyclical Redundancy Check Byte  
This byte is used by the receiver(s) of each message to determine if any errors have  
occurred during the transmission of the message. The MDLC calculates the CRC byte and  
appends it onto any messages transmitted onto the J1850 bus, and also performs CRC  
detection on any messages it receives from the J1850 bus.  
8
4
3
2
CRC generation uses the divisor polynomial X +X +X +X +1. The remainder polynomial  
is initially set to all ones, and then each byte in the message after the SOF symbol is serially  
processed through the CRC generation circuitry. The one’s complement of the remainder  
then becomes the 8-bit CRC byte, which is appended to the message after the data bytes,  
in MSB to LSB order.  
When receiving a message, the MDLC uses the same divisor polynomial. All data bytes,  
excluding the SOF and EOD symbols, but including the CRC byte, are used to check the  
7
6
2
CRC. If the message is error free, the remainder polynomial will equal X +X +X ($C4),  
regardless of the data contained in the message. If the calculated CRC does not equal $C4,  
the MDLC will recognize this as a CRC error, and will discard the message, not informing  
the CPU of the failure.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 114  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.5.2.4  
EOD - End of Data Symbol  
The EOD symbol is a short passive period on the J1850 bus used to signify to any  
recipients of a message that the transmission by the originator has completed.  
15.5.2.5  
IFR - In Frame Response Bytes  
The IFR section of the J1850 message format is optional. The MDLC does not support this  
option. The MDLC will not transmit an IFR under any circumstances. If an IFR is received  
from another node, the MDLC will ignore this part of the message and wait for the EOF  
symbol before resuming normal operation.  
15.5.2.6  
EOF - End of Frame Symbol  
This symbol is a passive period on the J1850 bus, longer than an EOD symbol, which  
signifies the end of a message. Since an EOF symbol is longer than an EOD symbol, if no  
response is transmitted after an EOD symbol, it becomes an EOF, and the message is  
assumed to be completed.  
15.5.2.7  
IFS - Inter-Frame Separation Symbol  
The IFS symbol is a passive period on the J1850 bus that allows proper synchronization  
between nodes during continuous message transmission. The IFS symbol is transmitted  
by a node following the completion of the EOF period.  
When the last byte of a message has been transmitted onto the J1850 bus, and the EOF  
symbol time has expired, all nodes must then wait for the IFS symbol time to expire before  
transmitting an SOF, marking the beginning of another message.  
However, if the MDLC is waiting for the IFS period to expire before beginning a  
transmission and a rising edge is detected before the IFS time has expired, it must  
internally synchronize to that edge. If a write to the MTCR register (initiate transmission)  
occurred on or before 104· tMDLC from the received rising edge, then the MDLC will transmit  
and arbitrate for the bus. If a CPU write to the MTCR register occurred after 104· t  
from  
mdlc  
the detection of the rising edge, then the MDLC will not transmit, but will wait for the next  
IFS period to expire before attempting to transmit the message.  
A rising edge may occur during the IFS period because of varying clock tolerances and  
loading of the J1850 bus, causing different nodes to observe the completion of the IFS  
period at different times. Receivers must synchronize to any SOF occurring during an IFS  
period to allow for individual clock tolerances.  
15.5.2.8  
BREAK - Break  
Any MDLC transmitting at the time a BREAK is detected will treat the BREAK as if a loss  
of arbitration had occurred, and halt transmission. The MDLC cannot transmit a BREAK  
symbol. If while receiving a message the MDLC detects a BREAK symbol, it will treat the  
BREAK as a reception error and clear any partially received message from the Rx buffer.  
15.5.2.9  
Idle Bus  
An idle condition exists on the bus during any passive period after expiration of the IFS  
period. Any node sensing an idle bus condition can begin transmission immediately.  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 115  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.5.3 J1850 VPW SYMBOLS  
Variable Pulse Width Modulation (VPW) is an encoding technique in which each bit is  
defined by the time between successive transitions, and by the level of the bus between  
transitions, active or passive. Active and passive bits are used alternately.  
Each logic one or logic zero contains a single transition, and can be at either the active or  
passive level and one of two lengths, either 64 µs or 128 µs (T  
at 10.4 kbps baud rate),  
NOM  
depending upon the encoding of the previous bit. The SOF, EOD, EOF and IFS symbols  
will always be encoded at an assigned level and length. See Figure 15-11: J1850 VPW  
Symbols  
Active  
128 µs  
64 µs  
64 µs  
OR  
OR  
Passive  
Logic "0"  
(a)  
Active  
128 µs  
Passive  
Logic "1"  
(b)  
Active  
200 µs  
200 µs  
Passive  
Start of Frame  
End of Data  
(c)  
(d)  
Active  
280 µs  
280 µs  
Passive  
End of Frame  
Break  
(e)  
(f)  
Figure 15-11 : J1850 VPW Symbols  
Each message will begin with an SOF symbol, an active symbol, and therefore each data  
byte (including the CRC byte) will begin with a passive bit, regardless of whether it is a logic  
one or a logic zero.  
All VPW bit lengths stated in the following descriptions are typical values at a 10.4 kbps bit  
rate.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 116  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.5.3.1  
Logic "0"  
A logic zero is defined as either an active to passive transition followed by a passive period  
64 µs in length, or a passive to active transition followed by an active period 128 µs in length  
(Figure 15-11(a)).  
15.5.3.2  
Logic "1"  
A logic one is defined as either an active to passive transition followed by a passive period  
128 µs in length, or a passive to active transition followed by an active period 64 µs in length  
(Figure 15-11(b)).  
15.5.3.3  
SOF - Start of Frame Symbol  
The SOF symbol is defined as a passive to active transition followed by an active period  
200 µs in length (Figure 15-11(c)). This allows the data bytes that follow the SOF symbol  
to begin with a passive bit, regardless of whether it is a logic one or a logic zero.  
15.5.3.4  
EOD - End of Data Symbol  
The EOD symbol is defined as an active to passive transition followed by a passive period  
200 µs in length (Figure 15-11(d)).  
15.5.3.5  
EOF - End of Frame Symbol  
The EOF symbol is defined as an active to passive transition followed by a passive period  
of at least 280 µs in length (Figure 15-11(e)). If there is no IFR byte transmitted after an  
EOD symbol is transmitted, after another 80 µs the EOD becomes an EOF, indicating the  
completion of the message.  
15.5.3.6  
IFS - Inter-Frame Separation Symbol  
The IFS symbol is defined as a passive period 300 µs in length. The IFS symbol contains  
no transition, since when used it always follows an EOF symbol.  
15.5.3.7  
BREAK - Break Signal  
The BREAK signal is defined as a passive to active transition followed by an active period  
of at least 280 µs (Figure 15-11(f)).  
15.5.4  
J1850 VPW VALID/INVALID BITS & SYMBOLS  
The timing tolerances for receiving data bits and symbols from the J1850 bus have been  
defined to allow for variations in oscillator frequencies. In many cases the maximum time  
allowed to define a data bit or symbol is equal to the minimum time allowed to define  
another data bit or symbol.  
Since the minimum resolution of the MDLC for determining what symbol is being received  
is equal to a single period of the MUX Interface clock (tMDLC), an apparent separation in  
these maximum time/minimum time concurrences equal to one cycle of tMDLC occurs.  
This one clock resolution allows the MDLC to properly differentiate between the different  
bits and symbols, without reducing the valid window for receiving bits and symbols from  
transmitters onto the J1850 bus having varying oscillator frequencies.  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 117  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
In VPW bit encoding, the tolerances for the both passive and active data bits and symbols  
are defined with no gaps between definitions. For example, the maximum length of a  
passive logic zero is equal to the minimum length of a passive logic one, and the maximum  
length of an active logic zero is equal to the minimum length of a valid SOF symbol  
200 µs  
128 µs  
64 µs  
Active  
(1) Invalid Passive  
Bit  
Passive  
a
Active  
(2) Valid Passive  
Logic Zero  
Passive  
a
b
b
Active  
(3) Valid Passive  
Logic One  
Passive  
Active  
c
c
(4) Valid EOD  
Symbol  
Passive  
d
Figure 15-12 : J1850 VPW Passive Symbols  
15.5.4.1  
Invalid Passive Bit  
If the passive to active transition beginning the next data bit or symbol occurs between the  
active to passive transition beginning the current data bit or symbol and a, the current bit  
would be invalid. See Figure 15-12(1).  
15.5.4.2  
Valid Passive Logic Zero  
If the passive to active transition beginning the next data bit or symbol occurs between a  
and b, the current bit would be considered a logic zero. See Figure 15-12(2).  
15.5.4.3  
Valid Passive Logic One  
If the passive to active transition beginning the next data bit or symbol occurs between b  
and c, the current bit would be considered a logic one. See Figure 15-12(3).  
15.5.4.4  
Valid EOD Symbol  
If the passive to active transition beginning the next data bit or symbol occurs between c  
and d, the current symbol would be considered a valid EOD symbol. See Figure 15-12(4).  
MOTOROLA  
Page 118  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
580 µs  
280 µs  
Active  
(1) Valid EOF  
Symbol  
Passive  
Active  
a
b
(2) Valid EOF+  
IFS Symbol  
Passive  
c
d
Figure 15-13 : J1850 VPW EOF and IFS Symbols  
15.5.4.5  
Valid EOF & IFS Symbol  
If the passive to active transition beginning the SOF symbol of the next message occurs  
between a and b, the current symbol will be considered a valid EOF symbol. If the passive  
to active transition beginning the SOF symbol of the next message occurs between c and  
d, the current symbol will be considered a valid EOF symbol followed by a valid IFS symbol.  
All nodes must wait until a valid IFS symbol time has expired before beginning  
transmission. However, due to variations in clock frequencies and bus loading, some nodes  
may recognize a valid IFS symbol before others, and immediately begin transmitting.  
Therefore, anytime a node waiting to transmit detects a passive to active transition once a  
valid EOF has been detected, it should immediately begin transmission, initiating the  
arbitration process. See Figure 15-13(1&2).  
15.5.4.6  
Idle Bus  
If the passive to active transition beginning the SOF symbol of the next message does not  
occur before d, the bus is considered to be idle, and any node wishing to transmit a  
message may do so immediately.  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 119  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
280 µs  
200 µs  
128 µs  
64 µs  
(1) Invalid Active  
Bit  
a
a
(2) Valid Active  
Logic One  
b
b
(3) Valid Active  
Logic Zero  
c
c
(4) Valid SOF  
Symbol  
d
d
(5) Valid BREAK  
Symbol  
e
Figure 15-14 : J1850 VPW Active Symbols  
Invalid Active Bit  
15.5.4.7  
If the active to passive transition beginning the next data bit or symbol occurs between the  
passive to active transition beginning the current data bit or symbol and a, the current bit  
would be invalid. See Figure 15-14(1).  
15.5.4.8  
Valid Active Logic One  
If the active to passive transition beginning the next data bit or symbol occurs between a  
and b, the current bit would be considered a logic one. See Figure 15-14(2).  
15.5.4.9  
Valid Active Logic Zero  
If the active to passive transition beginning the next data bit or symbol occurs between b  
and c, the current bit would be considered a logic zero. See Figure 15-14(3).  
MOTOROLA  
Page 120  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.5.4.10  
Valid SOF Symbol  
If the active to passive transition beginning the next data bit or symbol occurs between c  
and d, the current symbol would be considered a valid SOF symbol. See Figure 15-14(4).  
15.5.4.11  
Valid BREAK Symbol  
If the next active to passive transition does not occur until after d, the current symbol will  
be considered a valid BREAK symbol. Following the BREAK symbol, an IFS period must  
be observed, after which normal communication can resume on the J1805 bus. See Figure  
15-14(5).  
15.5.5  
MESSAGE ARBITRATION  
Message arbitration on the J1850 bus is accomplished in a non-destructive manner,  
allowing the message with the highest priority to be transmitted, while any transmitters  
which lose arbitration simply stop transmitting and wait for an idle bus to begin transmitting  
again.  
If the MDLC wishes to transmit onto the J1850 bus, but detects that another message is in  
progress, it must wait until the bus is idle. However, if multiple nodes begin to transmit in  
the same synchronization window, message arbitration will occur beginning with the first bit  
after the SOF symbol and continue with each bit thereafter.  
The VPW symbols and J1850 bus electrical characteristics are carefully chosen so that a  
logic zero (active or passive type) will always dominate over a logic one (active or passive  
type) simultaneously transmitted. Hence logic zeroes are said to be ’dominant’ and logic  
ones are said to be ’recessive’. Whenever a node detects a dominant bit when it transmits  
a recessive bit, it loses arbitration, and immediately stops transmitting. This is known as  
’bitwise arbitration’.  
"0"  
"0"  
"0"  
"1"  
"1"  
"1"  
"1"  
"1"  
"1"  
"1"  
Transmitter A detects  
an active state on  
the bus, and stops  
transmitting  
Active  
Transmitter A  
Passive  
"0"  
"0"  
"0"  
Active  
Transmitter B  
Transmitter B wins  
arbitration and  
continues  
Passive  
"0"  
transmitting  
Active  
J1850 Bus  
Passive  
Data  
Bit 2  
Data  
Bit 3  
Data  
Bit 4  
Data  
Bit 5  
Data  
Bit 1  
SOF  
Figure 15-15: J1850 VPW Bitwise Arbitration  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 121  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
During arbitration, or even throughout the message being transmitted, when an opposite  
bit is detected, transmission is immediately stopped unless it occurs on the 8th bit of a byte.  
In this case the MDLC will automatically append up to two extra 1 bits and then stop  
transmitting. These two extra bits will be arbitrated normally and thus will not interfere with  
another message. The second 1 bit will not be sent if the first loses arbitration. If the MDLC  
has lost arbitration to another valid message then the two extra ones will not corrupt the  
current message. However, if the MDLC has lost arbitration due to noise on the bus, then  
the two extra ones will ensure that the current message will be detected and ignored as a  
noise-corrupted message.  
Since a "0" dominates a "1", the message with the lowest value will have the highest  
priority, and will always win arbitration, i.e. a message with priority 000 will win arbitration  
over a message with priority 001. This method of arbitration will work no matter how many  
bits of priority encoding are contained in the message.  
If the MDLC loses arbitration during the transmission of a message, it will attempt to  
retransmit as soon as a valid EOF is detected on the J1850 bus. The MDLC will attempt to  
retransmit the message indefinitely, as long as messages with higher priorities continue to  
win arbitration.  
The only way to stop transmission retry due to loss of arbitration is to abort the transmission  
by setting the Tx Abort (TXAB) bit in the MDLC Control register. This will reset the internal  
Tx Buffer pointer and halt transmission.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 122  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.6 MDLC PHYSICAL INTERFACE  
All analog functions involved in transmitting and receiving from the J1850 bus are  
performed by the Physical Interface. The Physical Interface serves to buffer the incoming  
messages, wave-shape the messages being transmitted, and protect the MDLC from  
transients occurring on the J1850 bus.  
To J1850 Bus  
Physical Interface  
MUX Interface  
Protocol Handler  
Rx/Tx  
Buffers  
CPU Interface  
MDLC  
To CPU  
15.6.1  
OUTLINE  
The receiver analog comparator and transmitter drivers are included in the MDLC Physical  
Interface and together are referred to as the "transceiver".  
The transceiver provides a waveshaped 7V bus waveform in response to a timed logic  
signal from the MUX Interface. The transceiver actively drives the bus high, and passively  
lets an RC network pull the bus low. In order to achieve the 7V level necessary for the bus  
signal, the transceiver uses a battery supply (V  
) which is nominally 12V. The  
BATT  
transceiver also receives bus waveforms and provides the MUX Interface with unfiltered  
input data  
A low power mode of operation is automatically entered if the CPU executes a STOP or  
WAIT instruction.  
In the event that ground is lost, the transceiver senses this condition and releases the bus  
by switching the LOAD pin to a high impedance instead of a low impedance to ground.The  
transceiver also protects the MDLC by not passing on any standard disruptive or non-  
disruptive signals seen on the bus to the rest of the MDLC.  
The Physical Interface contains its own power-on reset circuit that is used to reset its  
control circuitry whenever a power-on condition is detected.  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 123  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
See Figure 15-16: MDLC Physical Interface Outline for an example mechanization for  
interfacing the MDLC module to the J1850 multiplex bus physical layer. Although this example  
mechanization is designed to provide some transient protection beyond what the MDLC  
module can withstand directly, the user should ensure that their circuit design meets the  
transient protection requirements of their application.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 124  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
MDLC Use  
R1  
C1  
L1  
TDK NL322522T-470J-3 (surface)  
TDK SP0203-470K-7 (leaded)  
1st node in system  
1.5kΩ±±1%  
3300pF/2700pF*  
TDK NL322522T-470J-3 (surface)  
TDK SP0203-470K-7 (leaded)  
All other nodes  
10.7kΩ±±1%  
470pF/220pF*  
PHYSICAL INTERFACE  
Sleep/Wake  
* Values account for load contributions by protection  
devices  
Sleep & Wake  
Control  
To V  
Prst  
DD  
31.6 k1%  
REXT1  
REXT2  
J1850 BUS  
24.9 k1%  
Txp  
Rxp  
V
CCA  
Locate close to  
connector  
Waveshaper  
Driver  
L1  
BUS  
47µH  
Both  
Rx Comparator  
+
-
TSMA16A(surface)  
P4KA16A(leaded)  
C1  
R1  
Keep lead lengths  
to a minimum on  
leaded devices  
LOAD  
Vref  
Example  
transient/ESD  
protection  
+12V  
V
BATT  
0.1µF  
+5V  
1N5822  
P6KE30A  
Voltage References &  
Control  
V
DD  
P6KE15A  
0V  
0.1µF  
V
SSD  
Example V  
transient protection  
Notes:  
BATT  
All circuit board grounds ( ) should be tied to a single point on the circuit board.  
The chassis ground ( ) should be tied to a single point on the chassis as close to the Bus connector as  
possible.  
The L1,C1 filter should be located as close to the Bus connector as possible.  
R1, REXT1, REXT2 and decoupling capacitors should be located as close as possible to the MDLC  
Transient protection circuits are optional and are only examples of how a protection scheme might be  
implemented, these devices may not be sufficient for all applications and under all circumstances.  
Figure 15-16 : MDLC Physical Interface Outline  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 125  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
 
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.6.2 MUX INTERFACE SIGNALS  
There are five signals which pass between the Physical Interface and the MUX Interface  
section of the MDLC as shown in Figure 15-16: MDLC Physical Interface Outline.  
These signals are now described.  
15.6.2.1  
Sleep/Wake  
This input signal is used to control the power consumption of the Physical Interface  
transmitter.  
When driven high by the MUX interface, the transmitter will enter a low power consumption  
Sleep mode. This will happen whenever the CPU executes a STOP or WAIT instruction.  
The transmitter is not capable of transmitting while it is in the Sleep mode.  
When driven low by the MUX interface, the transmitter will ’wake-up’ and become capable  
of transmitting messages. This will happen when the MDLC enters the Run mode.  
15.6.2.2  
Wake  
This input signal is used to exit the low power consumption mode of the Physical Interface  
transmitter.  
The MUX interface will drive this signal high and then low to notify the transmitter to wake  
up from Sleep mode.  
This will happen whenever the transmitter is in the Sleep mode and a passive to active  
transition occurs on the J1850 bus, causing the RxP signal to transition from low to high.  
15.6.2.3  
Prst  
This is the reset signal input to the Physical Interface.  
This signal is normally low and the MUX Interface will drive this signal high to reset the  
Physical Interface control circuits.  
15.6.2.4  
Txp  
This input signal represents the digital serial transmit data from the MUX Interface to the  
Physical Interface.  
When sending a passive phase, this signal will be driven low.  
When sending an active phase, this signal will be driven high.  
15.6.2.5  
Rxp  
This output signal represents the digital serial receive data from the Physical Interface to  
the MUX Interface.  
When receiving an active phase, this signal will be driven high.  
When receiving a passive phase this signal will be driven low.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 126  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.6.3  
PINS  
There are seven pins associated with the MDLC module. Figure 15-16: MDLC Physical  
Interface Outline gives an example mechanization. A brief description of each pin follows.  
15.6.3.1  
REXT1, REXT2  
These are external biasing resistor tie points for transmitter waveshaping and they must be  
referenced to the V pin through lines which are as low impedance and low noise as  
DD  
possible to ensure consistent operation.  
15.6.3.2 BUS  
This is the half-duplex data line for J1850 communications.  
15.6.3.3 LOAD  
This is the switched ground connection for the J1850 bus, via an RC load.  
15.6.3.4  
V
BATT  
This is the source for battery voltage for the MDLC. This power supply pin must be  
protected against transient and fault conditions.  
To protect against loss of battery, a low voltage protect circuit within the transceiver  
disables drive from the BUS pin to prevent erroneous messages from being transmitted.  
Nominal trip points are V  
Volts on V  
and V  
Volts on V  
.
TIVB  
BATT  
RIVD  
CCA  
15.6.3.5  
V
CCA  
This is the MDLC analog transceiver power supply input and is nominally 5V. This supply  
must be kept as low impedance and low noise as possible. It may be supplied from a  
different voltage regulator source than V  
DD.  
Whenever the voltage on this pin rises from zero to its nominal operating value, the  
Physical Interface detects this power-on condition and resets its control circuits. Also,  
whenever the voltage on this pin falls below its minimum operating value, the MDLC analog  
circuitry will return to its reset state.  
15.6.3.6  
V
SSA2  
This is the Physical Interface power supply ground. This supply must be kept as low  
impedance and low noise as possible. It must be connected directly to the same grounding  
point that the main MCU V uses.  
ss  
15.6.3.7  
Decoupling  
Good supply decoupling, as close as possible to the supply pins, is absolutely essential to  
guarantee correct operation, minimize RFI and maximize analog performance. MDLC and  
non-MDLC supply lines should be kept separate to minimize interaction. Emphasis should  
be placed on keeping supply and ground line impedances as low as possible, with  
preference given to ground lines if some compromise is necessitated. Ground planes and  
wide, short, PCB traces can help significantly here. Decoupling capacitors should be of low  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 127  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
impedance construction, with regard to high frequencies, and placed as close as is  
physically possible to the supply pins of the MDLC. See Motorola application note  
Designing for EMC with HCMOS Microcontrollers (AN1050) for more help on this matter.  
15.7 MDLC APPLICATION NOTES  
15.7.1  
INITIALIZATION  
The MCU will first write to the MDLC Control Register (MCR). This byte should configure  
the rate select bits to configure the MUX Interface clock to its nominal value, and set the  
Interrupt Enable bit if desired.  
15.7.2  
TRANSMITTING A MESSAGE  
The MDLC is ready for loading of a new message for transmission when the TXMS bit in  
the MDLC Status Register (MSR) is set to a 1, or had been set but was cleared by a  
subsequent access of the MDLC Transmit Control Register (MTCR). The MCU will first load  
bytes for transmission into the Tx Buffer. Once the data bytes have been loaded, the MCU  
will then write the transmit count to the MTCR register. This will command the MDLC to  
begin transmission on the J1850 bus at the next idle bus period. The MDLC will  
automatically calculate and append a CRC to the last byte of the transmitted message.  
If the IE bit was set in the MCR register an interrupt request will be generated for the receipt  
of this message from the J1850 bus. The MCU should clear the interrupt by an access (read  
or write) to the MTCR register. The TXMS and RXMS bits in the MSR register will be set  
by the MDLC upon reception of this message. The TXMS bit is cleared by any access (read  
or write) of the MTCR register. The RXMS bit is cleared by any access (read or write) of the  
MDLC Receive Status Register (MRSR). The MDLC is now available to transmit another  
message.  
A transmitting node should verify the correct transmission of its message by waiting for the  
Transmit Message Successful (TXMS) bit to be set in the MSR register. The only way to  
check for incorrect transmission of a message is for the MCU to provide a time-out if the  
TXMS bit is not set in a certain length of time. This is the only way to detect the  
unsuccessful transmission of a message, because any received message with errors is  
neither stored nor indicated as received in error by the MDLC.  
15.7.3  
RECEIVING A MESSAGE  
When a complete message is received by the MDLC error-free from the SAE J1850 bus,  
the RXMS bit in the MSR will be set. In addition, if the IE bit in the MCR is set, a CPU  
interrupt request will be generated. The RXMS bit and the CPU interrupt are cleared by an  
access (read or write) of the MRSR register, unless a second message has also been  
received from the SAE J1850 bus and is waiting to be retrieved.  
The MCU may extract received message bytes from the MDLC by reading successive Rx  
Buffer locations beginning at the lowest address location of the Rx Buffer. The received  
message bytes can be accessed any number of times, in any order, by the CPU. The CPU  
can determine the number of bytes to read by the Receive Count indicated in the MRSR  
MOTOROLA  
Page 128  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
register. If in Block mode (RXBM bit set by MCU in MCR register) the MCU should treat the  
received bytes as part of an in-progress message until the MDLC clears the RXBM bit.  
Once the received data bytes of interest to the CPU have been analyzed, the MCU must  
write any quantity to the MRSR register to free it for the next received message.  
15.7.4  
RECEIVING A MESSAGE IN BLOCK MODE  
Although not a part of the SAE J1850 protocol, the MDLC does allow for a special ’Block  
mode’ of operation for the receiver only. The MDLC cannot transmit Block mode messages.  
As far as the MDLC is concerned, a Block mode message is simply a long J1850 frame that  
contains an indefinite number of data bytes. All of the other features of the frame remain  
the same, including the SOF, CRC and EOD symbols.  
Another node wishing to send a Block mode transmission must first inform all other nodes  
on the network that this is about to happen. This is usually accomplished by sending a  
special predefined message. MDLC nodes wishing to receive the message should set the  
Receive Block Mode (RXBM) bits in the MDLC Control Register (MCR).  
Since the MDLC only has a finite amount of received data buffering available, the  
programmer must ensure that received data is moved from the Rx Buffers to the application  
memory throughout the duration of the Block mode message. The MDLC aids the user by  
utilizing both Rx Buffers to buffer the arriving data bytes in Block mode. As soon as one Rx  
Buffer fills, the incoming data ’spills over’ into the second Rx Buffer, the Received Message  
Successfully (RXMS) bit in the MDLC Status Register (MSR) will be set and a CPU interrupt  
request is generated, signalling to the user that an Rx Buffer must be emptied and "given  
back" in the same manner as explained for receiving normal messages. This alternate  
filling of Rx Buffers gives plenty of time for one Rx Buffer to be emptied by the user, while  
the other one is being filled by the MDLC.  
The Rx Buffers will continue to be alternately filled and emptied until an EOD symbol, or  
error, is detected. Throughout the reception of the Block mode message, the MDLC will  
calculate a running CRC. When an EOD symbol is finally detected, the CRC will be  
checked and, if correct, the Received Message Successfully (RXMS) bit in the MDLC  
Status Register (MSR) will be set, the RXBM bit will be cleared and a CPU interrupt request  
will be generated.  
Should the second Rx Buffer ever fill, then it will attempt to spill over into the first Rx Buffer  
which (hopefully) has been emptied in time. If not, an overflow condition is detected, both  
Rx Buffer pointers are reset (discarding the data currently held in the Rx Buffers), the  
RXBM bit will be cleared, and the MDLC will silently wait for the next normal J1850  
message to be received. Any other errors detected during the reception of a Block mode  
message (for example, invalid symbols) will result in these same actions.  
MDLC nodes not wishing to receive a Block mode message can leave the RXBM bit clear,  
causing all Block mode messages to be completely ignored. The next normal J1850  
message to appear on the bus will be automatically received as long as it contains no  
errors.  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 129  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
15.7.5 MDLC STOP MODE  
This power conserving mode is automatically entered from the Run mode whenever the  
CPU executes a STOP instruction, or if the CPU executes a WAIT instruction and the WCM  
bit in the MCR register is previously set. This is the lowest power mode that the MDLC can  
enter.  
A subsequent passive to active transition on the J1850 bus will cause the MDLC to ’wake  
up’ and generate a non-maskable CPU interrupt request. The MDLC is not guaranteed to  
correctly receive the message which woke it up since it may take some time for the MDLC  
internal operating clocks to restart and stabilize.  
When MDLC Stop mode is entered, the analog circuitry within the transmitter will be put  
into a power conserving ’sleep’ mode. In MDLC Stop mode the MDLC can neither do wave  
shaping nor drive any data. Therefore, it is important that the programmer ensures that all  
transmissions are complete or aborted before putting the MDLC into MDLC Stop mode.  
If this mode is entered while the MDLC is receiving a message, the first subsequent  
received edge will cause the MDLC to immediately wake up, generate a CPU interrupt  
request, and wait for the MDLC internal operating clocks to restart and stabilize before  
normal communication can resume. Therefore, the MDLC is not guaranteed to correctly  
receive that message.  
15.7.6  
MDLC WAIT MODE  
This power conserving mode is automatically entered from the Run mode whenever the  
CPU executes a WAIT instruction and the WCM bit in the MCR register is previously clear.  
A subsequent successfully received message, including one that is in progress at the time  
that this mode is entered, will cause the MDLC to ’wake up’ and generate a CPU interrupt  
request if the Interrupt Enable (IE) bit in the MCR register is previously set. This results in  
less of a power saving, but the MDLC is guaranteed to correctly receive the message which  
woke it up since the MDLC internal operating clocks are kept running.  
When MDLC Wait mode is entered, the analog circuitry within the transmitter will be put into  
a power conserving ’sleep’ mode. In MDLC Wait mode the MDLC can neither do wave  
shaping nor drive any data. Therefore, it is important the programmer ensures that all  
transmissions are complete or aborted before putting the MDLC into MDLC Stop or MDLC  
Wait mode.  
15.7.7  
CONTROLLING EXTERNAL VOLTAGE REGULATORS  
If the application node contains other, off-chip, supply voltage regulators that need to be  
controlled by J1850 network activity then an output port pin of the MCU must be reserved  
by the programmer for use as a Power Sense (PSEN) signal. This pin will provide a logical  
indication of when the MDLC is active through software.  
Whenever the MCU is in the normal (Run) mode of operation, the programmer should  
assert the PSEN output on the chosen port pin. The programmer should negate the PSEN  
output just prior to placing the microcontroller in the Stop or Wait mode.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 130  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
When the MDLC is in the MDLC Stop or MDLC Wait mode of operation, and network  
activity is sensed, a CPU interrupt request will be generated. As part of the service routine  
for this interrupt, the programmer should once again assert the PSEN output. Note that  
both V  
and V for the MDLC must be maintained in the MDLC Stop and MDLC Wait  
CCA  
DD  
modes of operation in order for this to work properly.  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
MOTOROLA  
Page 131  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
MOTOROLA  
Page 132  
SECTION 15: MESSAGE DATA LINK CONTROLLER  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 16  
INSTRUCTION SET  
The MCU has a set of 62 basic instructions. They can be divided into five different types:  
register/memory, read-modify-write, branch, bit manipulation, and control. The following  
paragraphs briefly explain each type. For more information on the instruction set, refer to  
the M6805 Family User’s Manual (M6805UM/AD3) or the associated MC68HC05 Data  
Sheet.  
16.1 REGISTER/MEMORY INSTRUCTIONS  
Most of these instructions use two operands. One operand is either the accumulator or the  
index register. The other operand is obtained from memory using one of the addressing  
modes. The jump unconditional (JMP) and jump to subroutine (JSR) instructions have no  
register operand. Refer to the following instruction list.  
Function  
Load A from Memory  
Mnemonic  
LDA  
Load X from Memory  
LDX  
Store A in Memory  
STA  
Store X in Memory  
STX  
Add Memory to A  
ADD  
ADC  
SUB  
SBC  
AND  
ORA  
EOR  
CMP  
CPX  
BIT  
Add Memory and Carry to A  
Subtract Memory  
Subtract Memory from A with Borrow  
AND Memory to A  
OR Memory with A  
Exclusive OR Memory with A  
Arithmetic Compare A with Memory  
Arithmetic Compare X with Memory  
Bit Test Memory with A (Logical Compare)  
Jump Unconditional  
JMP  
JSR  
Jump to Subroutine  
Multiply  
MUL  
16.2 READ-MODIFY-WRITE INSTRUCTIONS  
These instructions read a memory location or a register, modify or test its contents, and  
write the modified value back to memory or to the register. The test for negative or zero  
(TST) instruction is an exception to the read-modify-write sequence since it does not modify  
the value. Do not use these read-modify-write instructions on write-only locations. Refer to  
the following list of instructions.  
SECTION 16: INSTRUCTION SET  
MOTOROLA  
Page 133  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
Function  
Mnemonic  
INC  
Increment  
Decrement  
DEC  
CLR  
Clear  
Complement  
COM  
NEG  
ROL  
Negate (Two’s Complement)  
Rotate Left Thru Carry  
Rotate Right Thru Carry  
Logical Shift Left  
Logical Shift Right  
Arithmetic Shift Right  
Test for Negative or Zero  
ROR  
LSL  
LSR  
ASR  
TST  
16.3 BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS  
This set of instructions branches if a particular condition is met; otherwise, no operation is  
performed. Branch instructions are 2-byte instructions. Refer to the following list for branch  
instructions.  
Function  
Mnemonic  
BRA  
BRN  
BHI  
Branch Always  
Branch Never  
Branch if Higher  
Branch if Lower or Same  
Branch if Carry Clear  
Branch if Higher or Same  
Branch if Carry Set  
BLS  
BCC  
BHS  
BCS  
BLO  
BNE  
BEQ  
BHCC  
BHCS  
BPL  
Branch if Lower  
Branch if Not Equal  
Branch if Equal  
Branch if Half Carry Clear  
Branch if Half Carry Set  
Branch if Plus  
Branch if Minus  
BMI  
Branch if Interrupt Mask Bit is Clear  
Branch if Interrupt Mask Bit is Set  
Branch if Interrupt Line is Low  
Branch if Interrupt Line is High  
Branch to Subroutine  
BMC  
BMS  
BIL  
BIH  
BSR  
16.4 BIT MANIPULATION INSTRUCTIONS  
The MCU is capable of setting or clearing any read/write bit that resides in the first 256  
bytes of the memory space where all port registers, port DDRs, timer, timer control, and on-  
chip RAM reside. An additional feature allows the software to test and branch on the state  
of any bit within these 256 locations. The bit set, bit clear, and bit test and branch functions  
are each implemented with a single instruction. For test and branch instructions, the value  
MOTOROLA  
Page 134  
SECTION 16: INSTRUCTION SET  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
of the bit tested is also placed in the carry bit of the condition code register. The bit set and  
bit clear instructions are also read-modify-write instructions and should not be used to  
manipulate write-only locations. Refer to the following list for bit manipulation instructions.  
Function  
Mnemonic  
Set Bit n  
BSET n (n = 0. . .7)  
BCLR n (n = 0. . .7)  
BRSET n (n = 0. . .7)  
BRCLR n (n = 0. . .7)  
Clear Bit n  
Branch if Bit n is Set  
Branch if bit n is Clear  
16.5 CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS  
These instructions are register reference instructions and are used to control processor  
operation during program execution. Refer to the following list for control instructions.  
Function  
Mnemonic  
TAX  
Transfer A to X  
Transfer X to A  
Set Carry Bit  
TXA  
SEC  
CLC  
Clear Carry Bit  
Set Interrupt Mask Bit  
Clear Interrupt Mask Bit  
Software Interrupt  
Return from Subroutine  
Return from Interrupt  
Reset Stack Pointer  
No-Operation  
SEI  
CLI  
SWI  
RTS  
RTI  
RSP  
NOP  
STOP  
WAIT  
Stop  
Wait  
16.6 ADDRESSING MODES  
The MCU uses ten different addressing modes to provide the programmer with an  
opportunity to optimize the code for all situations. The various indexed addressing modes  
make it possible to locate data tables, code conversion tables, and scaling tables anywhere  
in the memory space. Short indexed accesses are single byte instructions; the longest  
instructions (3 bytes) permit accessing tables throughout memory. Short and long absolute  
addressing is also included. One- or 2-byte direct addressing instructions access all data  
bytes in most applications. Extended addressing permits jump instructions to reach all  
memory.  
The term “effective address” (EA) is used in describing the various addressing modes.  
Effective address is defined as the address from which the argument for an instruction is  
fetched or stored.  
SECTION 16: INSTRUCTION SET  
MOTOROLA  
Page 135  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
16.6.1 IMMEDIATE  
In the immediate addressing mode, the operand is contained in the byte immediately  
following the opcode. The immediate addressing mode is used to access constants that do  
not change during program execution (for example, a constant used to initialize a loop  
counter).  
16.6.2  
DIRECT  
In the direct addressing mode, the effective address of the argument is contained in a single  
byte following the opcode byte. Direct addressing allows the user to directly address the  
lowest 256 bytes in memory with single 2-byte instructions.  
16.6.3  
EXTENDED  
In the extended addressing mode, the effective address of the argument is contained in the  
2 bytes following the opcode byte. Instructions with extended addressing mode are capable  
of referencing arguments anywhere in memory with a single 3-byte instruction. When using  
the Motorola assembler, the user need not specify whether an instruction uses direct or  
extended addressing. The assembler automatically selects the shortest form of the  
instruction.  
16.6.4  
RELATIVE  
The relative addressing mode is only used in branch instructions. In relative addressing,  
the contents of the 8-bit signed offset byte (which is the last byte of the instruction) is added  
to the PC if, and only if, the branch conditions are true. Otherwise, control proceeds to the  
next instruction. The span of relative addressing is from -128 to +127 from the address of  
the next opcode. The programmer need not calculate the offset when using the Motorola  
assembler, since it calculates the proper offset and checks to see that it is within the span  
of the branch.  
16.6.5  
INDEXED, NO OFFSET  
In the indexed, no offset addressing mode, the effective address of the argument is  
contained in the 8-bit index register. This addressing mode can access the first 256  
memory locations. These instructions are only 1 byte long. This mode is often used to move  
a pointer through a table or to hold the address of a frequently referenced RAM or I/O  
location.  
16.6.6  
INDEXED, 8-BIT OFFSET  
In the indexed, 8-bit offset addressing mode, the effective address is the sum of the  
contents of the unsigned 8-bit index register and the unsigned byte following the opcode.  
The addressing mode is useful for selecting the Kth element in an element table. With this  
2-byte instruction, K would typically be in X with the address of the beginning of the table  
in the instruction. As such, tables may begin anywhere within the first 256 addressable  
locations and could extend as far as location 510. $1FE is the highest location that can be  
accessed in this way.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 136  
SECTION 16: INSTRUCTION SET  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
16.6.7  
INDEXED, 16-BIT OFFSET  
In the indexed, 16-bit offset addressing mode, the effective address is the sum of the  
contents of the unsigned 8-bit index register and the two unsigned bytes following the  
opcode. This address mode can be used in a manner similar to indexed, 8-bit offset except  
that this 3-byte instruction allows tables to be anywhere in memory. As with direct and  
extended addressing, the Motorola assembler determines the shortest form of indexed  
addressing.  
16.6.8  
BIT SET/CLEAR  
In the bit set/clear addressing mode, the bit to be set or cleared is part of the opcode, and  
the byte following the opcode specifies the direct address of the byte in which the specified  
bit is to be set or cleared. Any read/write register bit in the first 256 locations of memory,  
including I/O, can be selectively set or cleared with a single 2-byte instruction.  
16.6.9  
BIT TEST AND BRANCH  
The bit test and branch addressing mode is a combination of direct addressing and relative  
addressing. The bit that is to be tested and its condition (set or clear), is included in the  
opcode. The address of the byte to be tested is in the single byte immediately following the  
opcode byte. The signed relative 8-bit offset in the third byte is added to the PC if the  
specified bit is set or cleared in the specified memory location. This single 3-byte instruction  
allows the program to branch based on the condition of any readable bit in the first 256  
locations of memory. The span of branching is from -128 to +127 from the address of the  
next opcode. The state of the tested bit is also transferred to the carry bit of the condition  
code register.  
16.6.10 INHERENT  
In the inherent addressing mode, all the information necessary to execute the instruction is  
contained in the opcode. Operations specifying only the index register and/or accumulator  
as well as the control instructions with no other arguments are included in this mode. These  
instructions are 1 byte long.  
SECTION 16: INSTRUCTION SET  
MOTOROLA  
Page 137  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
MOTOROLA  
Page 138  
SECTION 16: INSTRUCTION SET  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 17  
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
17.1 MAXIMUM RATINGS  
(Voltages referenced to V  
)
SS  
Rating  
Symbol  
Value  
Unit  
V
Supply Voltage  
Input Voltage  
V
-0.5 to +42.0  
BATT  
V
V
-0.3 to V +0.3  
V
IN  
SS  
DD  
Current Drain Per Pin Excluding V and V  
I
25  
mA  
DD  
SS  
o
C
T
Operating Temperature Range  
MC68HC05V7XX (Standard)  
MC68HC05V7CXX (Extended)  
T to T  
A
L
H
0 to +70  
-40 to +85  
XX=B for SDIP, XX=FN for PLCC, XX=FU for QFP  
o
Storage Temperature Range  
T
-65 to +150  
C
STG  
Write/Erase Cycles (@ 10 ms write time & -40°C, +25°C, +85°C)  
Data Retention EEPROM  
10,000  
10  
cycles  
years  
This device contains circuitry to protect the inputs against damage due to high static  
voltages or electric fields; however, it is advised that normal precautions be taken to avoid  
application of any voltage higher than maximum-rated voltages to this high-impedance  
circuit. For proper operation, it is recommended that V and V  
be constrained to the  
IN  
OUT  
range V (V or V  
) V . Reliability of operation is enhanced if unused inputs are  
DD  
SS  
IN  
OUT  
connected to an appropriate logic voltage level (for example, either V or V ).  
SS  
DD  
17.2 THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS  
Characteristic  
Symbol  
Value  
Unit  
Thermal Resistance  
o
SDIP (56 pin)  
PLCC (68 pin)  
QFP (64 pin)  
θ JA  
θ JA  
θ JA  
60  
50  
85  
C/W  
C/W  
C/W  
o
o
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 139  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
17.3 DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
(V = 5.0 Vdc ±10%, V = 0 Vdc, T = -40°C to +85°C, unless otherwise noted)  
DD  
SS  
A
Characteristic  
Symbol  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Output voltage  
I
= 10.0 µA  
V
0.1  
V
Load  
OL  
V
V
V
-0.1  
OH  
DD  
Output High Voltage  
(I = -0.8 mA) PA0-7, PB0-7, PC0-7, PF0-3, PWM  
V
-0.8  
V
Load  
Output Low Voltage  
(I = 1.6 mA) PA0-7, PB0-7, PC0-7, PF0-3,PWM  
OH  
DD  
V
---  
0.4  
V
V
Load  
OL  
Input High Voltage  
Ports A, B, C  
V
0.V  
0.V  
V
V
DD  
DD  
IH  
V
BATT  
IGN  
BATT  
Input High Voltage  
V
V
V
IH  
0.V  
V
Ports D, E, F, IRQ, RESET, OSC1  
DD  
DD  
Input Low Voltage  
Ports A, B, C  
V
V
0.V  
0.V  
V
SS  
SS  
DD  
BATT  
IL  
V
IGN  
Input Low Voltage  
V
V
0.V  
Ports D, E, F, IRQ, RESET, OSC1  
V
SS  
SS  
V
DD  
IL  
0.V  
BATT  
V
Supply Current (see Notes)  
DD  
Run  
I
---  
---  
---  
5
3
---  
mA  
mA  
mA  
DD  
Wait SPI, TIMER, A/D, PWM, COP, and LVR enabled  
I
---  
---  
DD  
Wait above modules off  
Stop (Regulator disabled, LVR enabled)  
I
1.2  
DD  
25°C  
I
---  
---  
200  
---  
µA  
µA  
DD  
0°C to +70°C (Standard)  
-40°C to +85°C (Extended)  
25°C (LVR disabled)  
I
TBD  
TBD  
DD  
I
---  
---  
TBD  
100  
TBD  
---  
µA  
µA  
DD  
I
DD  
V
Supply Current at 12V  
BATT  
I
---  
---  
---  
25  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
µA  
µA  
µA  
BATT  
Stop Regulator disabled  
I
800  
250  
Run Regulator disabled (Transceiver current)  
BATT  
I
Stop Regulator enabled (includes STOP I  
, LVR disabled)  
BATT  
DD  
I/O Ports Hi-Z Leakage Current  
PA0-7, PB0-7, PC0-7, PF0-3  
±1  
±1  
µA  
µA  
I
IL  
Input Current  
RESET, IRQ, OSC1, TCAP, PD0-7,PE0-7, SS  
I
IN  
*
Capacitance  
Ports (as Input or Output)  
C
12  
8
pF  
pF  
OUT  
RESET, IRQ, OSC1, OSC2, TCAP, PD0-7,PE0-7, SS  
C
IN  
Low Voltage Reset Inhibit  
V
3.5  
3.6  
0.1  
4.2  
4.5  
0.3  
V
V
V
LVRI  
Low Voltage Reset Recover  
V
LVRR  
Low Voltage Reset Inhibit/Recover Hysteresis  
H
0.2  
LVR  
MOTOROLA  
Page 140  
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
V
V
slew rate rising *  
slew rate falling*  
S
0.1  
0.05  
100  
V/µs  
V/µs  
mV  
DD  
VDDR  
S
DD  
VDDF  
POR Reset Voltage *  
V
POR  
NOTES:  
1. All values shown reflect average measurements.  
2. Typical values at midpoint of voltage range, 25°C only.  
3. Run (Operating) I , Wait I : Measured using external square wave clock source to OSC1 (f = 4.2 MHz), all inputs  
DD  
DD  
OSC  
0.2 VDC from rail; no DC loads, less than 50 pF on all outputs, C = 20 pF on OSC2.  
L
4. Wait, Stop I : All ports configured as inputs, V = 0.2 Vdc, V = V -0.2 Vdc.  
DD  
IL  
IH  
DD  
5. Stop I measured with OSC1 = V  
.
SS  
DD  
6. Wait I is affected linearly by the OSC2 capacitance.  
DD  
7. Total  
* Not Tested.  
17.4 REGULATOR ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
(V  
= 12 Vdc ±10%, V = 0 Vdc, T = -40°C to +85°C, unless otherwise noted)  
BATT  
SS  
A
Characteristic  
Symbol  
Min  
Max  
Units  
V
1
Input Voltage  
V
BATT  
8
26.5  
--  
16  
40  
2,4  
Maximum Input Voltage transient amplitude  
V
V
V
BATTMAX  
BATTDUR  
2,4  
Maximum Input Voltage transient duration  
Output Voltage  
mS  
V
200  
5.25  
20  
V
DD  
4.75  
-
3
Output Current  
I
mA  
O
Input Bias Current  
IBIAS  
uA  
uVrms  
dB  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
65  
2
Output Noise Voltage  
V
N
-
-
2
Ripple Rejection Ratio  
RR  
5
Input - Output Differential Voltage V  
to V with V < min.  
BATT  
VDIFF  
ISHORT  
V
mA  
BATT  
DD  
1.5*  
75  
-
2.5  
Short Circuit Current Limit  
95  
2
Temperature Coefficient  
T
mV/°C  
mV  
c
TBD  
Line regulation  
VLINEREG  
VLOADREG  
-
-
50  
50  
Load regulation at 20mA  
mV  
Notes: (All values shown reflect average measurements.)  
1. Maximum voltage of 26.5V for 5 minutes only. If VBATT exceeds VBATTMAX, V  
may deviate from min/max limits.  
DD  
2. Guaranteed by design. Not tested in productions tests.  
3. This is the available current out of the V pin for off chip usage.  
DD  
4. This transient may be disruptive but will not be destructive.  
5. Total regulator load of 20mA. Lighter load currents result in lower V  
.
DIFF  
* max I of 20mA at V =3.5V.  
DD  
DD  
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 141  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
17.5 CONTROL TIMING  
(V = 5.0 Vdc ±10%, V = 0 Vdc, T = -40°C to +85°C, unless otherwise noted)  
DD  
SS  
A
Characteristic  
Symbol  
Min  
Max  
Units  
Frequency of Operation  
Crystal Oscillator Option  
External Clock Source  
f
f
0.1  
DC  
4.2  
4.2  
MHz  
MHz  
OSC  
OSC  
Internal Operating Frequency  
Crystal Oscillator (f ÷ 2)  
f
f
---  
DC  
2.1  
2.1  
MHz  
MHz  
OSC  
OP  
OP  
External Clock (f  
÷ 2)  
OSC  
Cycle Time (1 ÷ f  
)
t
nS  
OP  
CYC  
476  
---  
---  
TBD  
TBD  
---  
Crystal Oscillator Startup Time (Crystal Oscillator option)  
Stop Recovery Startup Time (Crystal Oscillator option)  
RESET Pulse Width Low (See Figure 8-1)  
IRQ Interrupt Pulse width low (Edge-Triggered)  
IRQ Interrupt Pulse Period (See Figure 8-1)  
PA0-7, PC0-7 Interrupt Pulse Width High (Edge-Triggered)  
PA0-7, PC0-7 Interrupt Pulse Period  
t
t
t
OXON  
CYC  
t
ILCH  
CYC  
---  
t
ns  
RL  
120  
120  
note 3  
120  
note 3  
90  
t
ILHI  
nS  
---  
t
t
t
ILIL  
IHIL  
IHIH  
osc1  
CYC  
---  
t
nS  
---  
t
CYC  
---  
OSC1 Pulse Width  
t
nS  
---  
EEPROM Programming Time per Byte  
t
mS  
mS  
mS  
mS  
µS  
µS  
EEPGM  
10  
---  
EEPROM Erase Time per Byte  
t
EBYT  
10  
10  
10  
---  
---  
EEPROM Erase Time per Block  
EEPROM Bulk Erase Time  
t
EBLOCK  
t
EBULK  
---  
EEPROM Programming Voltage Discharge Period  
RC Oscillator Stabilization Time  
t
FPV  
10  
5.0  
t
--  
RCON  
16-Bit Timer  
Resolution (note 2)  
Input Capture Pulse Width (See Figure 11-4)  
Input Capture Period  
t
4.0  
125  
note 4  
--  
--  
--  
t
t
RESL  
t
CYC  
nS  
t
TH, TL  
t
TLTL  
CYC  
NOTES:  
1. V = 5.0 Vdc ± 10%, V = 0 Vdc, T = T to T  
H
DD  
SS  
A
L
2. The 2-bit timer prescaler is the limiting factor in determining timer resolution.  
3. The minimum period t  
or t  
should not be less than the number of cycles it takes to execute the interrupt service routine  
ILIL  
IHIH  
plus 19 t  
.
CYC  
4. The minimum period t  
should not be less than the number of cycles it takes to execute the capture interrupt service routine  
TLTL  
plus 24 t  
.
CYC  
MOTOROLA  
Page 142  
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
17.6 A/D CONVERTER CHARACTERISTICS  
(V  
= 5.0 Vdc ±10%, V  
SSA1  
= 0 Vdc, T = -40°C to +85°C, unless otherwise noted)  
CCA  
A
Characteristic  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
Comments  
Resolution  
8
8
Bits  
Absolute Accuracy  
(V = 0 V, V  
1
= V  
)
LSB  
Including quantization  
±1 /2  
REFL  
REFH  
DD  
Conversion Range  
V
V
V
V
V
V
A/D accuracy may decrease  
REFL  
REFH  
proportionately as V  
is  
V
V
REFH  
REFH  
REFL  
-0.1  
DD  
V
V
reduced below 4.0  
REFL  
REFH  
100  
µs  
Power-up Time  
Input Leakage  
±1  
±1  
PD0-PD7, PE0-PE7  
,V  
µA  
µA  
V
REFL REFH  
Conversion Time  
(Includes Sampling Time)  
32  
32  
T
*
AD  
Monotonicity  
Inherent (Within Total Error)  
Hex  
Zero Input Reading  
Full-scale Reading  
Sample Time  
00  
FE  
12  
01  
FF  
12  
8
V
= 0V  
IN  
Hex  
V
= V  
IN  
REFH  
T
*
AD  
pF  
Not Tested  
Input Capacitance  
Analog Input Voltage  
V
V
V
REFL  
REFH  
100  
A/D On Current Stabilization Time (t  
RC Oscillator Stabilization Time (t  
)
µs  
µs  
ADON  
)
5
RCON  
*T  
AD  
= t  
if clock source equals MCU.  
CYC  
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 143  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
17.7 DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
9
(V =3.5-4.5 Vdc ±10% , V =0 Vdc, T =-40°C to +85°C, unless otherwise noted)  
DD  
SS  
A
Characteristic  
Symbol  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Output voltage  
I
= 10.0 µA  
V
0.1  
V
V
Load  
OL  
V
V
V
-0.1  
OH  
DD  
Output High Voltage  
(I = -0.2 mA) PA0-7, PB0-7,PC0-7,PF0-3,PWM  
V
-0.3  
V
V
V
V
V
V
Load  
Output Low Voltage  
(I = 0.4 mA) PA0-7, PB0-7,PC0-7,PF0-3,PWM  
OH  
DD  
V
0.3  
Load  
OL  
Input High Voltage  
Ports A, B, C  
0.8×V  
V
V
DD  
IH  
DD  
Input High Voltage  
V
Ports D, E,F, IRQ, RESET, OSC1  
V
0.7XV  
DD  
DD  
IH  
Input Low Voltage  
Ports A, B, C  
V
SS  
V
0.4XV  
IL  
DD  
Input Low Voltage  
0.3×V  
Ports D, E,F, IRQ, RESET, OSC1  
V
V
DD  
IL  
SS  
V
Supply Current (see Notes)  
DD  
Run  
I
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
---  
---  
---  
mA  
mA  
mA  
DD  
Wait SPI, TIMER, A/D, PWM, COP and LVR enabled  
I
DD  
Wait above modules off  
Stop (Regulator disabled, LVR enabled)  
I
DD  
25°C  
I
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
---  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
DD  
0°C to +70°C (Standard)  
-40°C to +85°C (Extended)  
25°C (LVR disabled)  
I
TBD  
TBD  
---  
DD  
I
DD  
I
DD  
I/O Ports Hi-Z Leakage Current  
PA0-7, PB0-7, PC0-7, PF0-3  
±±1  
µA  
I
OZ  
Input Current  
±±1  
±±1  
µA  
µA  
RESET, IRQ, OSC1, TCAP,SS  
PD0-PD7,PE0-7  
I
IN  
I
IN  
*
Capacitance  
Ports (as Input or Output)  
C
12  
8
pF  
pF  
OUT  
RESET, IRQ, OSC1,OSC2,TCAP,SS  
C
IN  
NOTES:  
1. All values shown reflect average measurements.  
2. Typical values at midpoint of voltage range, 25°C only.  
3. Wait I : Only timer system active.  
DD  
4. Run (Operating) I , Wait I : Measured using external square wave clock source (f  
DD DD osc  
=4.2 MHz), all inputs 0.2 V from rail;  
no dc loads, less than 50 pF on all outputs, C =20 pF on OSC2.  
L
5. Wait, Stop I : All ports configured as inputs, V =0.2 V, V =V -0.2 V.  
DD  
IL  
IH DD  
6. Stop I  
7. Wait I  
measured with OSC1=V  
.
DD  
SS  
is affected linearly by the OSC2 capacitance.  
DD  
8. The MDLC will not operate below 4.65 volts.  
* Not Tested.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 144  
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
17.8 CONTROL TIMING  
(V =3.5-4.5 Vdc ±10%, V = 0 Vdc, T = -40°C to +85°C, unless otherwise noted)  
DD  
SS  
A
Characteristic  
Symbol  
Min  
Max  
Units  
Frequency of Operation  
Crystal Oscillator Option  
External Clock Source  
f
f
0.1  
DC  
4.2  
4.2  
MHz  
MHz  
OSC  
OSC  
Internal Operating Frequency  
Crystal Oscillator (f ÷ 2)  
f
f
---  
DC  
2.1  
2.1  
MHz  
MHz  
OSC  
OP  
OP  
External Clock (f  
÷ 2)  
OSC  
Cycle Time (1 ÷ f  
)
t
nS  
OP  
CYC  
476  
---  
---  
TBD  
TBD  
---  
Crystal Oscillator Startup Time (Crystal Oscillator option)  
Stop Recovery Startup Time (Crystal Oscillator option)  
RESET Pulse Width Low  
t
t
t
t
OXON  
CYC  
CYC  
t
ILCH  
---  
t
RL  
CYC  
1.5  
IRQ Interrupt Pulse Width Low (Edge-Triggered)  
IRQ Interrupt Pulse Period  
t
nS  
ILIH  
120  
note 3  
120  
note 3  
90  
---  
t
t
t
ILIL  
IHIL  
IHIH  
osc1  
CYC  
---  
PA0-7, PC0-7 Interrupt Pulse Width High (Edge-Triggered)  
PA0-7, PC0-7 Interrupt Pulse Period  
OSC1 Pulse Width  
t
nS  
---  
t
CYC  
---  
t
nS  
---  
EEPROM Programming Time per Byte  
EEPROM Erase Time per Byte  
t
mS  
mS  
mS  
mS  
µS  
µs  
EEPGM  
15  
---  
t
EBYT  
15  
---  
EEPROM Erase Time per Block  
t
EBLOCK  
15  
---  
EEPROM Bulk Erase Time  
t
EBULK  
15  
---  
EEPROM Programming Voltage Discharge Period  
RC Oscillator Stabilization Time  
t
FPV  
10  
5.0  
t
--  
RCON  
16-Bit Timer  
Resolution (note 2)  
Input Capture Pulse Width (See Figure 11-4)  
Input Capture Period  
t
4.0  
250  
note 4  
--  
--  
--  
t
t
RESL  
t
CYC  
nS  
t
TH, TL  
t
TLTL  
CYC  
NOTES:  
1. The 2-bit timer prescaler is the limiting factor in determining timer resolution.  
2. The minimum period t  
or t  
should not be less than the number of cycles it takes to execute the interrupt service routine  
ILIL  
IHIH  
plus 19 t  
.
CYC  
3. The minimum period t  
should not be less than the number of cycles it takes to execute the capture interrupt service routine  
TLTL  
plus 24 t  
.
CYC  
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 145  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
17.9 LVR TIMING DIAGRAM  
t
t
VDDF = V /S  
VDDR= V /S  
DD VDDR  
DD VDDF  
V
V
LVRI  
LVRR  
V
DD  
Internal LVR  
Reset Pin  
MOTOROLA  
Page 146  
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
17.10 SPI TIMING  
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 147  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) TIMING  
(V = 5.0 Vdc ±10%, V = 0 Vdc, T = T to T )  
DD  
SS  
A
L
H
Num  
Characteristic  
Symbol  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
Operating Frequency  
Master  
Slave  
fOP(M)  
fOP(S)  
dc  
dc  
0.5  
4.2  
fOP  
MHz  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Cycle Time  
Master  
Slave  
tCYC(M)  
tCYC(S)  
2.0  
240  
tCYC  
ns  
Enable Lead Time  
Master  
Slave  
tLEAD(M)  
*
ns  
ns  
t
lead(s)  
240  
Enable Lag Time  
Master  
Slave  
tLAG(M)  
tLAG(S)  
*
ns  
ns  
240  
Clock (SCK) High Time  
Master  
Slave  
tW(SCKH)M  
tW(SCKH)S  
340  
190  
ns  
ns  
Clock (SCK) Low Time  
Master  
Slave  
tW(SCKL)M  
tW(SCKL)S  
340  
190  
ns  
ns  
Data Setup Time (Inputs)  
Master  
Slave  
tSU(M)  
tSU(S)  
100  
100  
ns  
ns  
Data Hold Time (Inputs)  
Master  
Slave  
tH(M)  
tH(S)  
100  
100  
ns  
ns  
Access Time (Time to Data Active from High-  
Impedance State)  
Slave  
tA  
0
120  
ns  
Disable Time (Hold Time to High-Impedance State)  
Slave  
tDIS  
tV(S)  
tHO  
240  
240  
ns  
ns  
10  
11  
12  
Data Valid (After Enable Edge)**  
Data Hold Time (Output) (After Enable Edge)  
0
ns  
Rise Time (20% V to 70% V , C =200 pF)  
SPI Outputs (SCK, MOSI, and MISO)  
SPI Inputs (SCK, MOSI, MISO, and SS)  
DD  
DD  
L
tRM  
tRS  
100  
2.0  
ns  
us  
13  
Fall Time (70% V to 20% V , C =200 pF)  
DD DD L  
SPI Outputs (SCK, MOSI, and MISO)  
SPI Inputs (SCK, MOSI, MISO, and SS)  
tFM  
tFS  
100  
2.0  
ns  
us  
* Signal production depends on software.  
** Assumes 200 pF load on all SPI pins.  
MOTOROLA  
Page 148  
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SS  
(INPUT)  
SS is Held High on Master  
12  
13  
13  
12  
5
SCK (CPOL=0)  
(OUTPUT)  
SEE  
NOTE  
4
5
1
SCK (CPOL=1)  
(OUTPUT)  
SEE  
NOTE  
4
7
6
MISO  
MSB IN  
BIT 6 --- 1  
11  
LSB IN  
(INPUT)  
11 (ref)  
12  
10  
MASTER LSB OUT  
10 (ref)  
MOSI  
(OUTPUT)  
BIT 6 --- 1  
MASTER MSB OUT  
13  
NOTE: This first clock edge is generated internally but is not seen at the SCK pin.  
Figure 17-1: SPI MASTER TIMING (CPHA = 0)  
SS  
(INPUT)  
SS is Held High on Master  
13  
12  
SCK (CPOL=0)  
(OUTPUT)  
5
SEE  
NOTE  
4
1
5
SCK (CPOL=1)  
(OUTPUT)  
SEE  
NOTE  
13  
4
12  
7
6
MISO  
MSB IN  
BIT 6 --- 1  
11  
LSB IN  
10  
MASTER LSB OUT  
(INPUT)  
11 (ref)  
10 (ref)  
MOSI  
(OUTPUT)  
BIT 6 --- 1  
MASTER MSB OUT  
13  
12  
NOTE: This last clock edge is generated internally but is not seen at the SCK pin.  
Figure 17-2: SPI MASTER TIMING (CPHA = 1)  
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 149  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SS  
(INPUT)  
13  
12  
13  
2
5
SCK (CPOL=0)  
(INPUT)  
4
1
5
SCK (CPOL=1)  
(INPUT)  
2
4
12  
8
9
SEE  
NOTE  
MISO  
(OUTPUT)  
BIT 6 --- 1  
11  
SLAVE  
6
MSB OUT  
7
SLAVE LSB OUT  
11  
10  
MOSI  
(INPUT)  
MSB IN  
LSB IN  
BIT 6 --- 1  
NOTE: Not defined but normally LSB of character previously transmitted.  
Figure 17-3: SPI SLAVE TIMING (CPHA = 0)  
SS  
(INPUT)  
12  
13  
13  
5
4
SCK (CPOL=0)  
(INPUT)  
4
5
1
SCK (CPOL=1)  
(INPUT)  
3
12  
2
10  
8
9
SEE  
NOTE  
BIT 6 --- 1  
SLAVE LSB OUT  
LSB IN  
MISO  
SLAVE MSB OUT  
(OUTPUT)  
11  
10  
7
6
MOSI  
(INPUT)  
MSB IN  
BIT 6 --- 1  
NOTE: Not defined but normally LSB of character previously transmitted.  
Figure 17-4: SPI SLAVE TIMING (CPHA = 1)  
MOTOROLA  
Page 150  
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
17.11 MDLC ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
17.11.1 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS  
(Voltages referenced to V  
unless otherwise indicated.)  
SSA2  
Rating  
Symbol  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
Unit  
Battery Voltage (V  
)
V
-0.3  
12.0  
16.0  
V
BATT  
BATT  
Reference Supply Voltage (V  
Bus Voltage (BUS)  
)
V
-0.3  
-2.0  
-2.0  
--  
5.0  
0 to 7.0  
7.0  
18.0  
+24.0  
10.0  
V
V
V
V
CCA  
CCA  
BUS  
V
Transient Voltage (V  
, BUS, TBD max. time)  
V
TRAN  
BATT  
Bus Voltage with respect to V  
V
--  
BATT  
BUS  
17.11.2 OPERATING CONDITIONS  
(Voltages referenced to V  
)
SSA2  
Rating  
) for proper MDLC operation  
Symbol  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
Unit  
Battery Voltage (V  
V
9.0  
12.0  
16.0  
V
BATT  
BATT  
BATT  
BATT  
Battery Supply Current (Run)  
Battery Supply Current (Stop)  
I
I
5
5
50  
50  
mA  
µA  
V
Reference Supply Voltage (V  
)
V
4.75  
5.00  
0.5  
40  
5.25  
2
CCA  
CCA  
CCA  
CCA  
Reference Supply Current (Run)  
Reference Supply Current (Stop)  
I
I
mA  
µA  
50  
17.11.3 TRANSMITTER D.C. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
(Total network Bus to V  
resistance = 245to 15k,  
ssa2  
V
= 9 to 16V, V  
= 5.0V ±5%, V  
= 0V, T = -40°C to +8°C, unless otherwise noted)  
SSA2 A  
BATT  
CCA  
Characteristic  
Symbol  
Min.  
Max.  
Unit  
Output High Voltage (BUS)  
Output Low Voltage (BUS)  
V
6.25  
8.0  
V
V
OH  
V
0
1.5  
OL  
Output Current (BUS, Loss of V  
8V)  
or V  
, VOUT = 0V, VIN = 0 to  
I
±1  
mA  
BATT  
SSA2  
OUT  
Output Current (BUS, Tx = passive, VIN = 12V)  
Output Current (BUS, Tx = active, VIN = 0V)  
I
I
-200  
200  
7.5  
mA  
mA  
V
OUT  
OUT  
Low voltage inhibit of transmitter for V  
Low voltage inhibit of transmitter for V  
V
6.0  
4.5  
BATT  
DD  
TIVB  
RIVD  
V
4.75  
V
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 151  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
17.11.4 TRANSMITTER A.C. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
(V  
= 9 to 16V, V  
= 5.0V ±5%, V  
= 0V, T = -40°C to +85∞∞°C, unless otherwise noted)  
SSA A  
BATT  
CCA  
Characteristic  
Number  
Symbol  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
Unit  
Transmitter Rise Time (REXT1 = 31.6kΩ, REXT2 = 24.9kΩ)  
Transmitter Fall Time (REXT1 = 31.6kΩ, REXT2 = 24.9kΩ)  
1
t
13.0  
14.5  
16.0  
µs  
R
2
t
13.0  
14.5  
16.0  
µs  
F
1
2
VOH  
6.25 V  
BUS  
2 V  
VOL  
0 V  
Figure 17-5: Transmitter A.C. Electrical Characteristics  
17.11.5 RECEIVER D.C. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
(V  
= 9 to 16V, V  
= 5.0V ±5%, V  
= 0 V, T = -40°C to +85°C, unless otherwise noted)  
SSA2 A  
BATT  
CCA  
Characteristic  
Symbol  
Min.  
Max.  
Unit  
Input High Voltage (BUS)  
Input Low Voltage (BUS)  
V
4.25  
V
IH  
V
3.5  
V
IL  
Input Current (BUS, Normal operation, Tx = passive, VIN = 0 to 8V)  
I
±10  
µA  
IN  
17.11.6 TRANSMITTER VPW SYMBOL TIMINGS  
(f  
= 1.048576 MHz, V  
= 12V, V  
= 5.0V, V  
= 0V, T = 25°C, unless otherwise noted)  
BATT  
CCA  
SSA2 A  
MDLC  
Characteristic  
Number  
Symbol  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
Unit  
Passive logic 0  
Passive logic 1  
Active logic 0  
10  
T
62.0  
64.0  
66.0  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
tvp1  
11  
12  
13  
14  
T
126.0  
126.0  
62.0  
128.0  
128.0  
64.0  
130.0  
130.0  
66.0  
tvp2  
T
tva1  
Active logic 1  
T
tva2  
Start of Frame (SOF)  
T
198.0  
200.0  
202.0  
tva3  
MOTOROLA  
Page 152  
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
Characteristic  
End of Data (EOD)  
Number  
Symbol  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
Unit  
15  
T
198.0  
200.0  
202.0  
µs  
tvp3  
End of Frame  
16  
17  
T
278.0  
298.0  
280.0  
300.0  
282.0  
302.0  
µs  
µs  
tv4  
Inter-Frame Separator (IFS)  
T
tv6  
17.11.7 RECEIVER VPW SYMBOL TIMINGS  
(f  
= 1.048576 MHz, V  
=12V, V  
= 5.0V, V  
= 0 V, T = 25°C, unless otherwise noted)  
BATT  
CCA  
SSA2 A  
MDLC  
Characteristic  
Number  
Symbol  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
Unit  
Passive logic 0  
Passive logic 1  
Active logic 0  
Active logic 1  
Start of Frame (SOF)  
End of Data (EOD)  
End of Frame  
Break  
10  
T
T
T
T
T
T
34.0  
64.0  
96.0  
µs  
rvp1  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
18  
96.0  
96.0  
128.0  
128.0  
64.0  
163.0  
163.0  
96.0  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
rvp2  
rva1  
rva2  
rva3  
rvp3  
34.0  
163.0  
163.0  
239.0  
239.0  
200.0  
200.0  
280.0  
800.0  
239.0  
239.0  
320.0  
T
rv4  
rv7  
T
Note: The receiver symbol timing boundaries are subject to an uncertainty of ± 1 TMDLC µs due to sampling considerations.  
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
MOTOROLA  
Page 153  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
14  
10  
12  
SOF  
"0"  
"0"  
13  
11  
15  
"1"  
"1"  
"0"  
EOD  
16  
17  
IFS  
EOF  
18  
BRK  
Figure 17-6: Variable Pulse Width Modulation (VPW) Symbol Timings  
MOTOROLA  
Page 154  
SECTION 17: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
SECTION 18  
05V7 BEHAVIOR DURING EMULATION  
This section covers the functions of the MCU that behave differently during emulation using  
either the 705V8/05V7 EVS or MMDS emulation systems. Since the 705V8/05V7 device  
itself is used in the emulator system and operates in TEST mode, some extra software  
operations must be performed to make the device behave as it will in the users application  
(USER mode). The circuits which require special treatment are described in the sections  
that follow.  
18.1 COP  
A value of $04 should be written to location $003F to enable the COP circuitry. The COP  
circuit is defaulted off to allow ease of factory testing. It should be noted that enabling the  
COP with this bit will enable the COP regardless of the state of the COPEN mask option.  
18.2 MDLC  
The MDLC requires bit 2 and 3 to be set in the MDLC Control Register ($0E) to allow normal  
operation of the MDLC. If these two bits are not set during emulation the MDLC will not  
transmit or receive.  
18.3 REGULATOR  
The voltage regulator should not be enabled in the device used in the top board of the  
emulator system. This may result in a supply voltage contention and may overheat and  
damage the emulator system.  
SECTION 18: 05V7 BEHAVIOR DURING EMULATION  
MOTOROLA  
Page 155  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  
Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.  
MC68HC05V7 Specification Rev. 1.0  
MOTOROLA  
Page 156  
SECTION 18: 05V7 BEHAVIOR DURING EMULATION  
For More Information On This Product,  
Go to: www.freescale.com  

相关型号:

MC68HC05V7CFU

8-BIT, MROM, 2.1MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP64, QFP-64
MOTOROLA

MC68HC05V7CFU

8-BIT, MROM, 2.1MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP64, QFP-64
NXP

MC68HC05V7FN

Microcontroller, 8-Bit, MROM, HCMOS, PQCC68, PLASTIC, LCC-68
ROCHESTER

MC68HC05V7FN

IC,MICROCONTROLLER,8-BIT,6805 CPU,CMOS,LDCC,68PIN,PLASTIC
NXP

MC68HC05V7FU

Microcontroller, 8-Bit, MROM, HCMOS, PQFP64, QFP-64
ROCHESTER

MC68HC05V7FU

Microcontroller, 8-Bit, MROM, 6805 CPU, 2.1MHz, HCMOS, PQFP64, QFP-64
MOTOROLA

MC68HC05V7FU

8-BIT, MROM, 2.1MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP64, QFP-64
NXP

MC68HC05X16

High-density complementary metal oxide semiconductor (HCMOS) microcontroller unit
MOTOROLA

MC68HC05X16

High-density complementary metal oxide semiconductor HCMOS) microcontroller unit
FREESCALE

MC68HC05X16CFU

8-BIT, MROM, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP64, QFP-64
MOTOROLA

MC68HC05X16CFU

Microcontroller, 8-Bit, MROM, HCMOS, PQFP64, QFP-64
ROCHESTER

MC68HC05X16FU

8-BIT, MROM, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP64, QFP-64
MOTOROLA